D'S METHOD ^^^^l^^l^^^i^^^-t^^ FRENCH GRAMMAR FIRST DIVISION i l ^u*miuii » ».mwitwn « .tf . tni wi »> ... « ini..ii. . i.»» n. . .,.i i i>. , .»««w i,it f « A.P.HUGUENET iiir iiiiwi iiiii II rrrimnni — rei HOSSFELD'S EDUCATIONAL WORKS. English-Spanish Grammar, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Classes, Schools, and Private Lessons . 3 Spanish-English Grammar, by Hossfeld's New Method 4 Key to above ... ... ... ... ... ...- 2 Conjugation of the Spanish Regular and Irregular Verbs " o English-Spanish Commercial Correspondent ... 2 German Spanish Commercial Correspondent. ... 2 French-Spanish Commercial Correspondent ... 2 Spanish-English and English Spanish Dictionary (New Edition)... ... ... ... 3 Ditto, by Velasquez ... ... ... ... ... 6 Ditto, by Velasquez (Large Edition) 24 Hossfeld's Spanish Reader ... ... ... ... 2 German-Spanish Reader ... ... ... ... 2 Hossfeld's Spanish Dialogues i Don Quixote, in Spanish 5 Gil Blas, in Spanish 2 English-Italian Grammar, by Hossfeld's New Method. arranged for Classes, Schools, and Private Lessons 3 Italian Composition AND Idioms 2 Conjugation of Italian Regular and Irregular Verbs ... ... ... ... ... ... ... o English- Italian and Italian-English Dictionary, by Melzi (2 vols.) ... ... ... ... ... 7 Ditto, by Millhouse (2 vols.) ... ... ... ... 12 Ditto, by Hossfeld 2 Italian Reader, by Dr. C. Scotti ... ... ... 2 I>ORTXJOXJESE. Grammar, by Grauert ... ... ... ... ... 5 I>XJTCH[. English-Dutch and Dutch-English Dictionary ... 4 K:XJSSXA^. English-Russian and RusslxnKxci.ish Dictionary ... 4 Hints on Language, by R. I. Isnard i - HIRSCHFELl) BROS., 22 AND 24, DKRAMS BUILDIKOS, FKTTKi; I-ANE, LONDON". E.G. HOSSFELD'S EDUCATIONAL WORKS. English-French Grammar, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Classes, Schools, and Private Lessons Elementary French Grammar... ... ... Advanced French Grammar French Composition and Idioms Conjugation of French Regular and Irregular Verbs ... Polyglot Correspondent (English, French, German Spanish) ... English-French Commercial Correspondent French-English Commercial Correspondent English-French Dictionary French-English Dictionary The Two Dictionaries in one volume ... Manual OF French Conversation ICG Passages Fo:a Translation into English and German loo Passages for Translation into German and French MoLiERE, Les Fourberies De Scapin ... English-German Grammar, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Classes, Schools, and Private Lessons . Mengel's German Exercises and Idioms Conjugation of German Regular and Irregular Verbs ... ... ... Hossfeld's German Reader English-German Commercial Correspondent French-German Commercial Correspondent English-German Dictionary ... ... German-English Dictionary . . The Two Dictionaries in one volume ... Select German Stories... ... English-Swedish and Swedish-English Dictionary . English - Dano - Norwegian and Dano - Norwegian - English Dictionary... ... 3 o 1 o 2 6 2 6 2 O I O 3 o 2 6 4 6 HIRSCHFELD BROS. 22 AND 24, BRKAMS BUILDINGS, FETTER LANE, LONI:ON. E.G. FRENCH GRAMMAR HOSSFELD'S NEW METHOD. INVALUABLE TO STUDENTS OF MODERN LANGUAGES. HINTS ON LANGUAGE As A MEANS OF MeNTAL DISCIPLINE, And on the Importance of the Study of Modern Languages, By PeOF. E. J. ISNARD. PRICE ONE SHILLING. HIRSGHFELD BROS., BREAMS BUILDINGS, FETTER LANE, LONDON, E.G. NEW PRACTICAL METHOD FOR LEARNING THE French Language BY A. P. HUGUENET, Officier d'Academie, Universite de France; Membre de la Societi Nationale des Professeurs de Francis en Angletem, Instructor Royal Naval College, Greenwich; Examiner at Queen's College, London, dtc. ; Occasional Examiner to Her Majesty's Civil Service Commissioners NEW AND REVISED EDITION. HIESCHFELD BROTHEKS, Breams Buildings, Fetter Lane, E.O, 1892. ENTERED AT stationers' hall. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. rc:^ill CONTENTS. pagt Preface 3 French alphabet 6 Accents and signs ... 6 Pronunciation of the vowels 6 Reading of words with vowels ... 7 Compound vowels.— Diphthongs 8 Pronunciation of the nasal sounds 8 Reading of words with compound vowels and diphthongs 9 Reading of words with nasal sounds 9 Pronunciation of the liquid sounds ... 10 Pronunciation of the consonants 10 Reading of words with liquid sounds 11 Reading of words with consonants 11 Linking of two words 14 Reading exercise on the linking of words 16 General exceptions to the rules of pronunciation ... 16 Division of syllables 18 Punctuation 18 Parts of speech 18 Numbers •• 19 Genders 19 The article and the noun. — Definite article 20 n page Formation of the plural of nounB ,., 20 Indefinite article 28 Partitive article 32 Words which are the same or nearly the same in English and French 36 The adjective 40 Qualifying adjectives. — Formation of the feminine ... 40 ff „ Formation of the plural ... 48 Degrees of comparison ... .., 48 Place of adjectives 52 Determinative adjectives. — Cardinal numeral adjectives 56 Ordinal numeral adjectives 60 Demonstrative adjectives 64 Possessive adjectives 68 Indefinite adjectives 68 The pronoun. — Personal pronouns ... 72 Demonstrative pronouns 80 Possessive pronouns 88 Relative and interrogative pronouns 92 Indefinite pronouns •.. 96 Verbs 104 Adverbs. — Adverbs of manner ... 108 Adverbs of time 112 Adverbs of place 112 Adverbs of order 112 Adverbs of quantity 112 Adverbs of comparison 112 Adverbs of affirmation, negation and doubt 112 Adverbs of interrogation 112 Prepositions 116 Conjunctions 120 Government of conjunctions 120 Interjections 128 Remarks on verbs 132 Words with aspirated h 136 tit pagt Twenty Dialogues 1 11 to 160 A meetiRg, une rencontre ... ... 141 About tlie way, or road, au mjet du chemin ... 142 Visit, viiite 143 'Rajlw&j ^ouTiiej, voyage en chemin defer 144 Sea journey, travers^e 146 At a town, dans une ville 147 Letting apartments, location d'appartements ... 148 With a servant, avec un domestique 149 Meals, repas 160 To write a letter, pour ^crire une lettre 161 At a money-changer's, chez un changeur ,^ ... 152 Buying, achats 163 Carriages, voitures 154 At table, d table 155 A walls., une promenade 166 With a doctor, avec un docteur 167 Paris Museums, Musses de Paris 158 The Streets of Paris, les rues de Paris 159 How to progress in French, comment fairs des progrh en Frangais 160 Syntax 162 Construction of affirmative sentences ,^ 166 Interrogative sentences 170 Negative sentences 178 Syntax of the article 186 Syntax of the noun.— Eules how to ascertain the gender of French nouns by their signification 194 Kules to ascertain the gender of French nouns by their endings ... ... ... ... ... ... 198 Gender of several nouns 206 Nouns which are of different gender according to their signification 214 Feminine of some nouns 218 Remarks on the number of nouns 222 Plural of compound nouns 226 IV pagt Syntax of the qualifying adjective. — Agieement of adjec- tives with nouns or pronouns 230 Place of adjectives 238 Adjectives of dimensions 242 Syntax of the determinative adjectives. — Possessive ad- jectives 246 Indefinite adjectives 250 Syntax of the pronoun. — Personal pronouns 254 Demonstrative pronouns ... ... 266 Indefinite pronouns 270 Syntax of the verb. — Subject of the verb 274 Complements of the verb 282 Use of the auxiliary verbs 286 Use of the tenses and moods 286 Syntax of the participles. — Present participle ... 298 Past participle 298 Instructions, how to correspond in French with the aid of Hossfeld's Commercial Correspondent ... 321- 336 The verb (supplement) 1 — 36 JNDBX Acute accent Adjectives ('qualifying) Adjectives (place of) Adjectives (complements of) Adverbs Affirmation, negation and doubt (adverbs of) ... Affirmative sentences (construction of) Agreement of adjectives with nouns or pronouns Agreement of participles Apostrophe Article (definite) Article (indefinite) Article (partitive) Article (syntax of the) Attribute Auj d Itty d l\ auxj to the Aucun^ nulf no, none ... Avoir VaiVf to look Auxiliary verbs (use of) 40, 44, 48 52, 238 242 108,112 112 166 230, 234 298, 302 5 20,24 28 32 186 162 24 68, 96, 250 242 286 Ge, cdf cettef ces, this, that, these, those 64, 80, 84 Ce, cedf celui-ci, celui-ld, ceux-ci. ceux-ld, d;c., this, that, these, those 80,84,266 CTiacwTi, everyone 96,270 Chague^ every, each ... 68 Cedilla 5 Circumflex accent 5 Collective nouns 278 Commercial correspondence 231,336 Comparison (adverbs of) 112 VI PAGb Comparison (degrees of) ... ... 48,52 Compound adjectives 234 Compound vowels (pronunciation of) 8 Compound nouns (plural of ) 226 Complements of the verb 282 Conjunctions 120,124,128 Conjunctive personal pronouns 72,76,254 Conversations... 22,26,30 (and on tlie 3rd page of each lesson) D Demonstrative adjectives 64 Demonstrative pronouns 80,84 Dialogues (twenty on subjects of every day life) ... 140 Diaeresis 5 Dimensions (adjectives of) ... ... 242 Dipthongs (pronunciation of) ... 8 Disjunctive personal pronouns 72, 76, 254 Dont, of whom, of which 92 Du, de la, de V, des, of the 24, 32 E Elle, elleSf she, they 72 En, of him, of her, of it, of them, in, by, thence ...72,76,246,262 Endings of French verbs (supplement) 35 Erf-ce gwe, is it that 174 ^i«c, they, them 72 Exercises 21, 25, 29 (and on the 2nd page of each lesson) F Feminine of adjectives 40,48 Feminine of some nouns ► 218 Ftu, late 230 G Genders 19 Gender* (how to ascertain by the signification) 194, 198 vn TAG* Genders (how to ascertain by the endings) ... 198, 202 General collective nouns 278 Government of verbs (supplement) 32 Grave accent 5 GenSy people 210 H H (aspirated) 136 Hyphen 6 I iZ, t75, he, they "72 Imperfect, past definite, past indefinite (use of the) 290 Indefinite adj ectives 68 Indefinite adjectives (syntax of) 250 Indefinite pronouns 96,100 Indefinite pronouns (syntax of) 270 Interjections ... 128 Interrogation (adverbs of) 112 Interrogative pronouns 92 Interrogative sentences 1 74 Irregular verbs, first group (supplement) 24 Irregular verbs, second group (supplement) ... 26 J J*, I ..« ••• ••• •.. ••• ••• ••• '2 L Le, Za, P, ?«s, the 20,24 L«, la, V, les, him, her, it, them 72, 76, 258 Lequely laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, which 92 Leur.Uurs, their 68,246,278 L«ur, to them 72 Lui leur, he, to him, to her, to them 72, 76, 262 Le mien, le tien, le sien, Sec, mine, thine, his, hers, its, &c. 88 Lronounced like k when before ce and ci: exceder, excellence, excepter, exctper, exciter Linking of two words. The linking of two words is the pronouncing of the iast consonant of a word with the first syllable of the next word wlien it begins with a vowel or mute /*. Linking only takes place between words closely connected by their moaning, as articles and nouns, adjectives and nouns, }>ersonal pronouns and verbs; Ex. : lea^amis, deux heaux^oiseaux, ils^ont parU, In linking d is pronounced like <,/like v, 8 and x like z: Ex.: le grand^ enfant, le inauvais^homme, neuf^auHf dix^oiseaux. 15 tostaia distracted that de) jeune theiere taffetas young tea-pot taffeta valet troisieme exceder servant third to excede Eeadtno of Words with Consonants. jet facade aristocratie laitier liomme septieme the^itre throw front aristocracy milkman man seventh theatie taclier distrait que deinocratie portier cafetiere democracy porter coffee-pot plat lit seditieux dish bed seditious beaux assez zele flue enough zeal vassal chaque zenith chez velours exercer quinze vassal every zenith at velvet todxerciae fifteen maison exceptor doux zephir nez Athenien house to except sweet zephyr nose Athenian impartial radieux isolement salade musicien sultan impartial radiant loneliness salad musician sultan rat ambitieux imposant miserable collection superiorite rat ambitious imposing miserable collection superiority - physique expedition radeau reussir escalade flux physics expedition raft to succeed scaling flow rassemblement hypocrite opposition crise majeste gathering hypocrite opposition crisis majesty Reading exercise on the linking of words. Nous'^avons. Trois^oiseaux. Un petit'^homme. We have Three birds A little man Ils'^eurent. Vous'^avez. Des'^'habits^uses. Les'^etats They had You have Some coats worn out The states Nous'^atten don ."'"Alfred. Ils'^ont. Six'^heures. Esfello We expect Alfred They have Six hours Is she chez^elle? Comment vous'"appelez-vous ? Deux^amis. at home How yourself do call you Two friends Il'^esfici. Mes^ent'ants. Nos^ennemis. Ell es'^entre rent. He is here My children Our enemies They entered Un grand'^nmi. 11 a neuf^ans. Avez-vous'^un mauvais^ A good fi ieud He has nine years Have you » had ouvrier? workman 16 General Exceptions to the Rules of Pronunciation. (For reference only.) 1. A is silent in — aoMj Sa6iie, toos^ (si pronounced.) 2. B (final) is sounded in — club, nabab, rob. 3. c (final) is silent in — accroc, banc, blanc, clerc, eric, croc, 4c7iecs, escroc, estomac, fianc, franc, lacs, marc, pore, raccroc, tabac, tronc. Also in the singular present of the verbs vaincre and convaincre ; as inje vaincs, il convainc, etc, 4. c & CH sound like g in — second, drachme. 5. D is sounded in — siid, Talmud. 6. E is silent between g and a or o, when it serves to give the g the soft sound ; as in vengeance, pigeon, etc. 7. E sounds like d, if the first letter of a word, and followed by a double consonant ; and in all words beginning with dess, as in efil'acer, essarter, dessecher, etc., also in the word et (and), 8. E sounds like a at the beginning of the adverbial termination em- inent, as in prudemment, etc.; e has also the sound of a in the words /(3WOT«, solennel, and their derivatives. 9. F (final) is silent in— bceiifs, cerf, cerf -volant, chef-d'oeuvre, clef^ (or cle), nerfs, oeufs. 10. Q (final) is sounded in— grog, zigzag. 11. Q is silent in— doigt, legs, signet, vingt. 12. GN is pronounced hard g-n in — agnat, cognat, gndme, gndmon, igni, ignition,ignicole,impregnation,in£xpugnable,stagnant,stagnation. 13. L is silent in — haril, chenil, coutil, fusil, gentil, outil, persil, sourcil. 14. M is silent in — damner, condamner, automne. 15. P is sounded in — cap, cep, croup, group, hanap, jalap, julep, salep ; also in septembre, septuple. 16. P is silent in — corps, temps, printemps. 17. R is sounded in the end syllable er {e pronounced ^) of the following words of more than one syllable : — amer, belv4der, cancer, cuiller, cutter, enfer, fier, f rater, hier, hiver, magister, outremer, pater, and in proper names. 18. R is silent in — monsieur, messieurs. 19. s (final) is sounded in — atlas, biceps, bis, cassis, chorus, fits (pronounce fiss), gratis, jadis, lis, mals, mars, mrnurs, oasis, obus, omnibus, ours, papyrus, prospectus, rebus, tournevis, typhus, vis, and in all nouns in us derived from the Latin. 20. T (final) is sounded in — abject, aconit, brut, Christ, chut, contact, cm-rect, cobalt, diificit, district, direct, dot, est (east), exact, fat, incorrect, indirect, infect, intellect, lest, mat, net, ouest, post, pr6t4rit, rit, strict, suspect, test, tra^isit. 21. T in tie sounds like t in — Epizootic, rCtie, sotie. 22. T in ti sounils like t in — chr6tien, entretien, maintien, soutien ; and in bestial, bestiaire, vestiaire, galimatias, and their derivatives. 23. T in tier sounds like s in all the tenses of verbs in tier (except cJuUier): as in balbutier, balbutiant^ nous balbutions^ etc. 17 24. ST is silent in — est (is) and Jdstts Christ, but is pronounced in Christ. 25. Tii is silent in — as'hms, asthmatique, isthme, 26. u after q>', or gu, is sounded in — iquestre, Equidistant, Equilateral, Equitation, liqut^ji' r, questeur, quintuple, — arguer, aiguille, guise, inextinguib.e, linguistiqar, and in all words derived from the adjective aigii; as, aiguiser, etc. 27. u in qua sounds like the French oxt in — aquarelle, aquatique, Equateur, Equation, quatuor, quaternaire, quinquagEnaire, and their derivatives ; and in all words beginning with quadr ; as, quadruptde. 28. X (final) is sounded in — Aix, index, lynx, prEfix^ »ilex, sphynx. 29. X sounds like z in — deuxidme, dixidme, sixitme. 30. X sounds like ss in — Auxonne, Bruxelles, Cadix, soixante. 31. z is sounded in — gaz, and in words of foreign origin — Bodez, SiS^z, Cortez, Fernandez. 32. EU sounds like the French u in the tenses of the verb avoir; as in, feus, eu, quefeusse. 3. OB & ot sound like (the French) oi in — moclle, poSle. 84. 01 sounds like o in — encoignure^ oignon, empoigner, poignardt poignet. 35. ILL is not liquid but fully sounded in — Achille, codicille, distiller, imbEcillitE, Lille^ osciller, pupille^ scintiller, titiller, tranquille, vaciller. 36. IL is liquid in — avril, bahil, pEril, grEsil, gentilhomme, and some- times in cil and gril. 37. AM, EM, TM, UM at the end of words are not nasal, and the m is sounded; as in — Abraham, album, etc. but they remain nasal in — Adam, dam, quidam, parfum. 38. EMM at the beginning of words is nasal and sounds like en-m; as in eminAnager, emmener, etc. 39. ENT in the 3rd person plural of verbs is silent ; as in — ils parlent, elles parlcraient. 40. EN is nasal in — enivrer, ennoblir, enorgueillir, ennui (and its de- rivatives). tl. EN sounds like atw (nasal) in — Benjamin, examen, mentor, inemento. 42. EN sounds like tnn in — abdomen, am^n^ Eden, gluten, gram^n^ Hymen, lichen. 43. lEN (not ienn) in the tenses of the verbs venir and tenir, and their derivatives sounds like i-ain (nasal) ; as in — je viens, nou^ ticTidrons, etc. 44. AEN & AON sound like an (nasal) in — Caen,faon,paon, taon, (some- times pronounced ton). N"0TB : Tlie nasal sound is generally written with m before p and b ; as in, empire, rompre, imj)Erial. Consonants at the end of foreign proper names are generally pronounced, as in — Alep, Bagdad, ^trifiles,. IS Division of Syllables. In French words are divided into syllables according to the following principal rules : 1. A consonant between two vowels commences the new syllable ; as, i-nu'ti-le, a-mi, p^-re, a-ca-de-mie 2. When there are two consonants between two vowels one of them belongs to the first and the other to tne second syllable; as, eX'Cep-ter, e-xer-ceVj col-lec-tion, in-cor-po-ra-tion 3. Consonants however followed by I or r are not added ^ to the first syllable but commence the second; thus, ta-hleau, fa-hle, li-vre, ceu-vre Punctuation. The signs of punctuation are the same as in English, viz: (,) virgule, comma; (.) point, period; (;) point-et- virgule, semi-colon ; ( :) deux points, colon ; ( 1 ) point d'ex- damation, note of exclamation; (?) point d' inter rogation, note of interrogation. Parts of Speech. The French language contains ten parts of speech. Six are flexible: le sub stantif or nom, the noun; V article, the article; Vadjectif, the adjective; le pronom, the pro- noun; le verbe, the verb; and le participe, the participle. Four are inflexible: Vadverhe, the adverb; la proposition, the preposition; la cow/owci/ow, the conjunction ; and T in- terjection, the interjection. Definition of the Parts of Speech. The Article (Vartide) is a word used before nouns to limit or define their application; as, the man, Vlwmme; the house, la maison a man, uu homiiie; a house, une maison The Noun (le nom) is the name of anything which exists, or which we can conceive to exist, whether material or immaterial ; as, man, homme; house, maison; virtue, vcrtu The Adjective (Vadjectif) is a word added to a noun to qualify or determine it; there are two kinds of adjectives in French: — 1. the qualifying adjective as in En.i,dish ; as, a good boy, un bon gar^on; the yoimg girl, la jeuno fiUe % the determinative adjective, in English ordinarily called pronoun*, »8, thif boy, ce gan^&n; which girl, (pielle Jille; my sou, moii^/.« A Pronoun (un pronom) is a word used instead of a noun ; as, ffe (John) is rich, 11 (Jean) est riche; this is good, ceci est bon The Verb (le verbe) is a word by whicli we affirm — 1. What anybody or anytWng does; 2. Wliat is done to him or to it; 3. In what state he or it exists ; as, the man works, Vhomme travaille ; the boy was punished, le gargon fut puni ; the child sleeps, V enfant dort The Participle (le participe) is so called because it partakes of the nature of the verb from which it is derived, and as- sumes in part the nature of an adjective; as, 2L son protecting his mother, un fils protegeant sa m^e; a burnt house, wrw maison incendiee ; your letter is badly written, voire letlre est mal ecrite An Adverb (un adverbs) is a word which modifies a verb, an adverb, or an adjective ; as, he wrote well, il 6crivait bien ; he will be here soon, il sera bientot ici; my sister is as pretty, tna soeur est zxxssijolie The Preposition (la proposition) serves to show the relation of a noun or pronoun to some other word in the sentence ; as, the book is on the table, le livre est sur la table; he sat behind me, il Uait assis derriere moi A Conjunction (une conjonction) is a word which serves to connect the different parts of an extended sentence ; as, John and Jacob went out yesterday, Jean et Ja^ob sortirent hier; I cannot come, because I am ill, je ne puis pas venir, par- ceque je suis malade The Interjection (V interjection) is a word which expresses any sudden desire or violent emotion ; as, Hushl^^aio;/ chut I ah! ah! alas! hilasi hrAvo \ fort bien/ Numbers. There are two numbers in French the singular and the plural; the singular refers to one person or thing, the plural to more than one. Genders. There are but two genders in French, the masculine and tlie feminine; therefore things which are neuter in English are in French either masculine or feminine. Eules to ascertain the gender of inanimate objects will be g'ven later on ; but we advise students never to learn a noun without placing; either the definite or indefinite article bc^lore it, as this is by far the best plan ior fixing the proper gender m the memory. 20 First Lesson. Premiere Le^on The ARTICLE and the NOUN. The Definite Article Ihe is translated: le before a masculine singular noun beginning with a con- sonant; as, — lefr^e, the brother; le Uvre, the book. la before a feminine singular noun beginning with a con- sonant ; as, — la sosur, the sister ; la porte, the door. r before masculine or feminine nouns in the singular, when they begin with a vowel or h mute; as, — I'oncle, the uncle; rh6tel,{m.*) the hotel; Vdglise, (f.*) the church; Vhdtesse, the laudlady. les before masculine or feminine nouns in the plural; as, lesfHres, the brothers; les sceurs, the sist^jrs; les hdtels (m.), the hotels ; les 4glises (/.), the churches. Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 1. — The plural of nouns is formed by adding s to the singular; as, — le Uvre, the book, les livres, the books ; le chat, the cat, les chats, the cats; la sceur, the sister, les sosurs, the sisters ; la maison, the house, les maisons, the houses. 2. — Nouns ending in s, a;, z do not change in the plural ; as, le bras, the arm, les bras, the arms ; la voix, the voice, les voix, the voices ; le nez, the uose, les nez, the noses. The Verbs hting of the utmost importance we shall add a portian of them to each lesson^ independently of the other rules. The auxiliary verb avoirj to have. Singular. Indicative Present. Singulak. ai-je, have /?(+) as-tu, hxist thouf a-t-il, ha^ hef Ist Person j'ai,(**) I have 2nd ,, tu as, thou hast „ , f il a, (r/i. ) he has ^^^ »» Xelleii,{f.)shehas Plural. Ist Person nous avous, ^D€ have 2nd ,, vous avez, you have ft«^ i ii^ o^t» i'"^' ) 1 ^^y ^^ »» tellesont,(/".)i;Mive a-t-elle, has she f Plural. avons-nous, Juive wet avez-vous, have yout (*) We indicate the geiid«r of nouns either by jdacing le before or m. (masculine) after a masculine noun, la before or/, (feminine) after a feminine noun. (**) j«. «*. «i«i ftwc, ce, se, etc. before a vowel become/, ji', m', qu', c', s', etc. (t) In the interrogative form the pronoun is j)laced after the verb and a liyphen inserted; if tlie 3id pei-son singular ends in a vowel, for euphony's sake, a ( lij 1 placed between two hyphens is inserted (-t-). 21 is to be learned and, et {*) arm, bras m.(**) book, livre m. brother, fr^re m. cat, cfiat m. clmrcb, ^(jlisef. dog, chien m. door, porte /.{**) The Vocabulary by heart as these words will not be given again hand, 7nain f. i nose, nez m. herring, 'hareng w.(t) I price, prize, prix vr^ hotel, Miel m. | sir, monsieur m.(*} house, tnaisonf. landlady, hdtessef, madam, madaTnef. mouse, sour is f. no, nmi sister, soeur f. , uncle, oncle m. j voice, voixf. j who, whom, qui ' yes, oui "Exercise No. 1. Translate the Singular and Plural of the foUovririg nouns and articles 1. The brother, the brothers, — the dog, the dogs, — the nail (cZot» w.), the nails, — the sister, the sisters, — the cow (vachef.), the cows,— the hand, the hands, — the child {enfant m.), the children, — the hotel, the hotels, — the church, the churches, — the story {histoire f), tht stories, — the mouth {nwis m.), the months, — the mouse, the mice,— the price, the prices, — the nut {iioixf), the nuts, — the nose, the noses, — the book, the books, — the landlady, the landladies, — the herring, the herrings, — the voice, the voices, — the cat, the cats, — the fan [iven- tail m.), the fans, — ^the arm, the arms, — the door, the doors, — the un- cle, the uncles, — the coat {hahit m.), the coats. He has, — have we? — have I? — you have, — have they (/.)? — thou hast, — has she? — they have, — we have, — ^has he? — have you? — I have, — have they? — she has, — they (/.) have, 2. Les freres et les soeurs. Le chat et la souris. L'h6tesse a le chien. lis ont entendu^ la voix. Avez-vous lu^ le livre ? Nous avons les maisons. J'ai vu^ I'eglise. A-t-il vu^ I'h&tel? Qui a les harengs ! Le bras et la main. L'oncle a donn6* le prix. EUe a deux^ hotels. La maison a deux*^ portes. The cats and the mice. Have we the books? He has two** uncles The arms and the hands. Who has seen' the hotels ? Have you tht dogs? The sister has given* the prizes. Who has seen^ the chui 3hes? Has she the herring ? The landlady has two^ houses. Who bas heard^ the voices? The brother has the hotel. Has he the dog « iTes, he has the dog. Have you seen^ the cat, sir ? No, madam. (*) Pronounce et—i ; monsiewr — me-si-eu (**) Students should always place the article before a noun tliey are learning, this being the best way to remember the proper gender : U bms, Ui porte, etc (t) The h when aspirated, i.e. to be pronounced, is indicated by an apostrophe ('A) and in this case U or la must be used and not V. I entendu, heard 2 iu, read 3 vu, seen 4 dorme, given 5 detix, two ' Questions on Grammar. I. How is the definite article the rendered in French? I. When is le used, when la, when l\ and when Zest i. How is the translated before 'h (aspirated) ? 4. WTiat is the gender of a noun preceded by fe, what when preceded by lat. 5. What is the first and general rule for the formation of the plural if nouns ? 6. Which nouns do not change in the plural? 7. When is the e o[je elided and an apostrophe placed instead* 8. What is the place ot the pronoun subject iii the interrogative 'orrn of verbs in French ? 9. When is a t between two hyphens inserted after the verl- » Conversation. sir. Good morning, ") (jrood day, J Good evening, madam. Thanks, (thank you). Have you the book, madam ? No, sir, his f'mj sister has the book. Has he seen {yu) his {son) uncle ? Yes, sir. Has she the cat? No, madam, she has the dog. What {qice) have they in {dans) their {leurs) hands ? They have four (qimtre) herrings. Who has bought {achele) the hotel ? His {son) brother has bought the hotel. Has the dog (translate : the dog has he) the mouse? No, it is (c'estj the cat which (qui) has the mouse. Have you heard {entendu) the voice ? Yes, I have heard the voice. Has the church (tmualate: the church has she) two doors? No, the church has three doors, and the house has two doors. Has he paid {payi) the price asked (demanoU) for (pour) the dog? Yes, he has paid the price. Bonjour, monsieur. Bonsoir, madame. Merci (je vous remercie), Avez-vous le livre, madame? Non, monsieur, sa soeur a le livre. A-t-il vu son oncle? Oui, monsieur. A-t-elle le chat? Non, madame, elle a le chien, Qu'ont-ils dans leurs mains? lis ont (luatre hiirengs. Qui a achete I'hdtel? Sou frere a achete I'hotel. Le chien a-t-il la souris? Non, c'est le chat qui a la soaH^ Avez-vous entendu la voixt Oui, j'ai entendu la voix. L'eglise a-t-elle deux portes? Non, l'eglise a trois portes, et la maison a deux portes. A-t-il paye le prix demand^ pour le chien ? Oui, il a pay^ le prix. Reading Exercise C^O No. 1. Tout commewcemewt est(24t)difficile. Qu'avez-vousdans All coramenccineut la difficult What have you in votre main? J'ai un journal fraw9ais. Qu'est-ce? A your hand I have a newspaper French What is that To qui apparh*ewt(43+)cela?Sowt-ils riches? Etes-vous pauvre? whom belongs that Are they rich Are you ' poor n fait froid. Fait-il chaud? Qui est la? Bowjour. It makes cold Makes it warm Who is there Good day Bowsoir. Bonne nuit. Ou etiez-vous^hier(17)? J'etais^a la Gh)od evening Good night Where were you yesterday I was at the campagne. Je n'ai pas d'argeiit. Ou est-il? Notre chat country I „ have not of money Where is he Our cat a pris'^une souris. Parlez-vous firtW9ais? Oui, un peu. has caught a mouse Speak you French Yes a little Pouvez-vous me comprendre? Pas du tout. Que desirez- Can you me understand Not at all What wish vous? YeuiJlez me donner mow chapeau? Je vous you Will me give my hat I you remercie. Sortirez-vous cette apres-midi? Now; je thank Will go out you this afternoon No I resterai chez moi. Le te)Mps(16pest trop froid. Aujourd'hui shall remain at me The weather is too cold To-day il fait tres chaud. Quelle heure esf^il? II est dix'^heures. it makes very warm What hour is it It Is ten houra Pourquoi venez-vous si tard ? J'ai raawque le train. Mow Why come you so late I have missed the train My frere Otaif^aujourd'hui au theatre. Veu«7/ez prewdre un brother was today at the theatre Will take a siege. N'oubliez pas de venir ce soir. Dem am soir seat „ Forget not to come this evening To-mono w evening nous'^irows'^au cowcert. Avez-vous deja dine ? Now, nous we shall go to the concert Have you already dined No we ne ditioris pas'^avawt six'^heures. A demam. „ dine not before six hours To to-morrow (*) In order to assist the student in practising these exercises nasal and liquid sounds are printed in italics, and the linkin;? is indicated by a curved line, (t) The figure in iiarenthesis indicates the gi-oup amongst which the word 1$ incidued on pages? !♦) and IT. 24 Sboond Lesson. Deuxieme Legon. The iVRTiCLE and the Noun (continued). The article is frequently preceded by prepositions as in English; but the articles le and Zes, can never be pre- ceded by de, (of or from), or a (to or at), and the following contractions are used: du instead of de Ze| before a masculine singularnoun be- atu „ „ d Ze I ginning with a consonant; as — dufrhrey of the brother. aufrlre, to the brother. du livre, of the book. au livre, to the book. des instead of de Zes (^before masculine and feminine aux „ ., a Zesj nouns in the plural ; as, — des/Hres, of the brothers. auxfr^res, to the brothers. des soeurs, of the sisters. aux sceurs, to the sisters. des oncles, of the uncles. aux oncles, to the uncles. des hdtesses, of the landladies. aux hdtesses, to the landladies. Observation: la and V are never contracted; as— " de la sceur, of the sister. d la sceur, to the sister. de I'oncle, of the uncle. d Voncle, to the uncle. The form of the English Possessive : the father s hat, the girl's bon- nets, Charles' book, etc., must be altered when translating into French thus: the hat of the father, le chapeau du pere; tJie bonnets of the girl, les chapeaux de la fille ; the book of Charles, le livre de Charles etc. Formation of the Plural of Nouns (continued). 8. — Nouns ending in au and eti take x in the plural instead of 8 ; as, — le chapeau, the hat, les chapeaux, the hats. le neveu, the nephew, les neveux, the nephews. 4r. — Nouns ending in al change this termination into aux; as, — le cheval, the horse, les chevaux, the horses. Vanimal, the animal, les animaux, the animals. The auxiliary verb Stre, to be. Indicative Present. je suis, lam i suis-je, am If tu es, thou art i es-tu, art thou t il, elle est, , he, she is I est-il, est-elle, is he, is she f nous sommes, vk are sommes-nous, are we f vous etes, you are 6tes-vous, are you ? lis, elles sont, thet; are i sont-ils (elles), are tJicyf Interrogative sentences, as: ZTos the aunt read the book? Are the goldiers in the house f etc., must be changed in form, when trans- lating into French, thus : The aunt has she read the book, la tante a- t-elle lu le livre? the sohlien are they in the house, les soldats sont-ils dans la maison ? animal, animal w. aunt, tantef. bird, oiseau m. chair, chaise f. curtain, rideau m. fire, feu in. general, gen6ral m. 2S hat (bonnet), cJiapeaU'. officer, officier vn. horse, cheval m. [m. on, sur in, dans \ room, chambrej knife, couteau m. I soldier, soldat wu nepliew, neveu in, '. street, ruef. newspaper, jov,r/uil m. • table, table/, niece, niece f. '< where, ow. Exercise No. 2. 1. Of the soldier, to the soldier, — of toe dog, to the nog, — of the anus, to the arms, — of the rooms, to the rooms,— of the hotels, to thf hotels, — of the churches, to the churches, — of the table, al(*)the table, of the hotel, at the hotel, — of the church, to the church, — tlie brother's book, — the aunt's cat, — the oflicer's dogs, — the landlady's chairs, — tht sisters' house, — the curtain, the curtains, — of the knife, of the knives, — to the fire, to the fires, — the general, the generals, — of the news- paper, of the newspapers, — to the horse, to the horses, — the niece's bonnets, — to the animal, to the animals, — to the street, to the streets, — of the bird, to the birds. He is, — are we? — am I? — you are, — are they (/.)? — thou art, — is she? — they are, — is he? — have you? — I am, — has he? — are you? — we have, — we are, — 1 have, — she is. 2. La soeur a-t-elle vu^ le chien de la tante ? Les soldats du gene- ral sont dans la rue. J'ai deux^ neveux. C'est^ le cheval de I'officier. Les joumaux sont-ils dans la chambre? Nous sommes les nifeces de I'hdtesse. Avez-vous parl6* au fr^re ? C'est^ le prix des chapeaux. Les livres sont sur la table. Le general a-t-il ecrit^ aux officiers? J'ai parle* k ]a soeur du soldat. Od sont les rideaux? A-t-elle deux* cliions? Avez-vous ecrit' k rh6tesse de Tonclel L*offi.3:er a-t-il vu' les chevauxt Avez-vous vu^ le livre sui* la table? Has the aunt the uncle's knives? Are you the soldiei's brother ' Have you seen^ the generals? We have spoken* to the landlady'* nephew. Has the officer seen^ the newspapers ? Are the general'i horses in the street ? I have written^ to the officer's niece. lie ha? two^ nephews. I have given* the birds to the soldier. The aunt'b bonnet is on the chair. We have given* the curtains to the officer's sisters. Where are the aunt's cats? We have seen^ the soldiers. 1 have written' to the uncle. Is she in the room ? Has the general's nephew given* the kniie to the officer? (*) aX must be translated like to. 1 vu, seen 2 diut, two 3 (iesi, that is 4 yarU, spoken 5 ivrii, writteu 6 (2on?W given. 26 Questions on Grammar. 1. How are of the, and to the translated before a riasculine singular noun commencing with a consonant ? 2. How are of the and to the translated before a feminine singular noun commencing with a consonant ? 3. How are of the and to the translated before a singular noun, whether masculine or feminine, commencing with a vowel or h mute ? 4. How are of the and to the translated before a noun in the plural ? 6. Can the prepositions de or A precede the articles U or lesi if not, what must be used instead ? *?. What nouns form their plural by adding jc? 7. What Douns form their plural by changing their termination intc aux] I. How do vou translate into French, the brotlier's bookf the dog's nose, the U7icle 8 voicet Charles' hat! Conversation. Where is the uncle's book ? The uncle's book is on the chair. Who is in the father's room? The aunt is in the father's room. Have you seen the niece's bird? Yes, sir, the niece's bird is on the table. Has the landlady's nephew the knife? Yes, madam, he has the knife. Have you read {lu) the paper, madam ? Yes, sir, I have read the papers which (qui) are on the chair. Is youi brother (an) officer ? Yes, madam, he is [a] general. Where have you seen (rw) the sister's bonnet ? We have seen her (son) bonnet in the brother's room. Is the soldier's dog in the street? No, madam, he is in the house. Hast thou seen the mouse in the room? Yr-s, I have seen the cat and the mouse. To whom (qui) have you given {donne) the cuitains? I have given the curtains to the woman. Ou est le livre de I'oncle? Le livre de I'oncle est sur la chaise. Qui est dans la chambre du pere? La tante est dans la chambre du pere. Avez-vous vu I'oiseau de la niece ? Oui, monsieur, I'oiseau de la niece est sur la table. Le neveu de I'hdtesse a-t-il le cou- teau? Oui, madame, il a le couteau. Avez-vous lu le journal, madame? Oui, monsieur, j'ailu les journaux qui sont sur la chaise. Votre frfere est-il officier ? Oui, madame, il est general. Ou avez-vous vu le chapeau de la soeur ? Nous avons vu son chapeau dans la chambre du frere. Le chien du soldat est-il dans Is rue? Non, niadame, il est dans Is maison. As-tu vu la souris dans la chambre^ Oui, j'ai vu le chat at la souris. A qui avez-vous donnr I's ridcaux! J'ai donuc les li '. .u.: 'ilafemme. 27 Reading Exercise No. 2. Tout ce qui hrille n'est pastor. Ouvrez la fenetre. All that which glitters „ is not gold Open the window Fermez la porte. Ou demeurez-vous ? Nous demeurons Shat the door Where live you We live dans cette jolie maisow. Quand^avez-vous'^achete cef^ in this pretty house When have you bought this habit? Ou est votre soeur? Elle est'^allee se promener coat Where is your sister She is gone herself to walk avec sa tawte. Les jours'^augmentent(39)sewsiblemewt. Le with her aunt The days increase sensibly The tewps(16petaittres beau avanf^hierCl?). II ne f ait pas'^aussi weather was very fine the day before yesterday It „ makes not so froid'^'en'^ilw^leterre que dcms le Nord de la France. J'ai cold in England as in the North of the France I have ouhlie d'acheter des gants. Comment s'appellent(39)les sept forgotten to buy some gloves How themselves call the seven jours de la semaine? lis s'appellent; Iwndi, mardi, days of the week They themselves call Monday Tuesday mercredi, jeudi, vendredi, samedi et dimanche. Quels Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday and Sunday What sont les noTOS des mois de I'annee? Janvier, fevrier, are the pames of the months of the year January February mars(19), avril,(36)mai, jmn, juiV/et, aout(l), septembre(15), March April May June July August September octobre, novcmbre et decewbre. Lisez-vous des livres October November and December Read you any books tran9ai8? Oui, quelquefois. Lisez-vous'^a haute voix? French Yes souietimes Read you at loud voice Oui, toujours; car mow professeur m'a dit que c'etait la Tea always for my professor me has said that this was the seule maniere d'acqnerir una pronor/ciation correct©. only manner of to acquire a pronunciation correct Pouvez-vous me compresson. Troisi^me Leqon The Article (continued) and the Noun (concluded). The Indefinite Article a or an is translated: ttw before masculine singular nouns ; as, — unfHre, a brother; un animal, an animaL une before feminine singular nouns; as, — une hdtesse, a landlady ; UTie porte, a door. Note. — de before a vowel or h mute becomes d' ; thus, d^un, d'une, of a yr of an Formation op the Plural op Nouns (concluded). Exceptions to the formation of the Plural of No^ms. Exceptions to Rule 1. — a). Seven nouns ending in ou add a in the plural ; viz : le bijou, the jewel ; le caillou, the pebble ; le chon, the cabbage ; le genou, the knee ; le hibou, the owl ; le joujou, the toy ; le pou, the louse. — Plural: les bijoux, les cailloux; dec. b). Seven nouns ending in ail form their plural by changing that termination into aux; viz: le bail, the lease; le corail, the coral; l^muil (m.), the enamel; le soupirail, the air hole; le travail, the work; le vantail, the leaf of a foldiug door; le vitrail, the stained glass- window. — Plural : les baux, les coraux, etc. Exceptions to Rule 4. — Pive nouns ending in al add 5 in the plu- ral; viz: le bal, the ball; le r^gal, the feast; lecarnaval, the carnival; lechacal, the jackal ; le nopal, the cactus. — Plural : lesbals, lesr6gals, etc. The following four nouns form their plural irregularly ; viz : — Valeul (m.), the ancestor; Plural: les aieux Ze aW, the heaven ; ,, les cieux roeilfm.), the eye; „ les yeux lebUail, ihe coXile', ,, lesbestiaux However dels is used when it means skies, and in a few componncl nouns ; osils is used in a;ils de ba^uf, oval window, and a:ils de chM, cat's eyes (jewels) ; aleuls is used in the meaning of grandfathers. The Auxiliary Verbs avoir, to have, and Stre, to be. Imperfect. j'avais, I hnd I j'etais, Twos tu avais, thou hadst 11, elle avait, he, she had nous avions, we had vous aviez, you had lis, elles avaient,(*) they had tu 6tais, thou waM 11, elle etait, he, she ivn-s nous etions, loe were vous 6tiez, yoii were ils, elles etaient,(*) they yrrrr. Observation : Whenever negations, as : -pas, not, rien, nothing, jamais, never, etc. are used with a verb, the particle ne is also required. Ne can only be used with verbs, and must always precede the verb, aft. je n^ai pas, I have not. ne suis-je pas, am I not ? n*avavi-je pa^, had I not t je n'4tais pas, I was not. (•) 0nt of all verbs in tbe 8rd person plural is mnte. (vide Exception 39.) The ball, la halle plnr : les halles „ ball (festival), le hal; plur: les hals ,, boy, le gar^on ,, child, V enfant m. ,, daughter or girl, lafilU 29 the eye, Voeil m ; plur : Us yeux ,, father, lepdre ,, garden, lejardin ,, knee, le genou; plur . les genoux ,, letter, la lettre ,, man, Vhomvu m. the motheT,lamire\m. ,, parents, lesparents ,, pen, la plume ,, pencil, Ze crayon ,, son, le Jils ,, watch, ?a montre ,, woman, Za/emm« lor, ^owr Exercise No. 3. 1. A father, — a mother, — a pencil, — a pen, — of a son, — of a daugh- ter, — to a man, — to a woman, — the knee, the knees, — at the ball, at the balls, — of the eye, of the eyes, — the parents' letter, — a child's ball, — the chairs of a room, — the mice or the birds, — the son's aunt, — to the garden, — an animal's knees, — to the curtains, — the noses and the eyes, — the general's nephews, — a herring and the cat, — to the hand, — an officer's horses, — at (to) an hotel, — to the voices, — the door of a church, — a boy's watch, — the uncle's hats, — of the fires, — to a girl, — from a watch, — to a soldier, — at (to) a table, — from (of) the men. You had, — hadst thou? — had he?— they (/.) had, — had we? — I had, — had they? — she had, — was she? — they were, — thou wast, -were you? — was I? — we were, — were they (/.)? — he was, — he is not, — have I not ? — are we not ? — you have not, — were they not ? — he has not, — you had not, — you are not, — 1 had not, — has she not? — they have not, — are they (/.) not? 2. Avez-vous une plume et un crayon? La fille de la femme n'a pas la lettre. Qui avait lesjournaux? 0^ ^taient les fils du general? N'avez-vous pas donne^ les livres au p^re? Les en fan ts n'etaient pas dans un jardin. L'officier est le neveu d'un general. Nous n'avions pas les balles. Le livre est-il sur la table ou sur la chaise? La montre etait pour I'oncle. Le fils de I'homme n'avait-il pasun couteau? J'avais ^crit^ une lettre h, la mere.. For whom was the letter? Had the uncle a watch? Who has given^ the balls to the children ? Where was the father ? He was not in the landlady's house. Has the boy a pencil ? I have not written'' to the man. The eyes of a horse are large {grands). Has the mother given^ the hats to a woman ? Was the aimt in the garden or in the house? The parents have not the curtains. Were the newspapers not on a table ? The nieces and (the*) nephews were in a garden. Were you at a ball? (•) Tn French before every noun the article must he employed, even if in English the article be not repeated. 1 drmrU, given 2 icrit, written. 30 Questions on Grammar. 1 . Is the indefinite article w?i, une the translation for a or an or for both? 2. When is un and when is wm used ? 3. How is of a ov of an translated ? 4. What is the general (first) rule in French for the formation of the plural of nouns ? 5. What is the second rule \ 6. What is the third rule [ for the formation of the plural of nouns ? 7. What is the fourth rule J 8 How many nouns ending in ow and ail are exceptions to nile 1, and how do they form their plural ? 9. Are there any nouns ending in al (rule 4) which do not change into avoi in the plural ? 10. Are there any other exceptions ? 11. Are verbs used negatively accompanied by one negation only as in English ? 12. What participle can never be used without a verb — that it must always precede ? 13. Is ent in the 3rd ])erson pluial of a verb ever pronounced ? Conversation. Have you a pen, sir I No, madam, 1 have no (pasde) pen, but fmaisj 1 have a pencil. Has the uncle a son and two (deux) daughters ? No, sir, he has two sons and one (une) daughter. Have you given (donne) the letter to the mother I No, I have not given the letter to the mother, but to the father. Has the woman a watch ? Yes, she has a watch and a knife. Have they seen (vu) the child's ball? Yes, madam, they have found (trouv6) two balls. Has the boy large (de y rands) eyes ? Yes sir, the boy and the girl have large eyes. What (que) have you seen in the street ? We have seen a horse which (qui) had both (lesdeux.)\i\iQQ& brnk'»n (rnfR'fi). Avez-vous une plume, monsieur ? Non, madame, je n'ai pas de plume, mais j'ai un crayon. L'oncle a-t-il un fils et deux fillea ? Non, monsieur, il a deux tils et une iille. Avnz-vous donn^ la lettre k la mere ? Non, je n'ai pas donne la lettre ^ la mere, mais an p^.re. La femme a-t-elle une montre ? Oui, elle a une montre et un con teau. Ont-ils vu la balle de I'enfant ? Oui, madame, ils out trouve deux hallos. liC gallon a-t-il tie grands yeux ? Oui, monsieur, le gar9on et la filie ont de grands yeux. Qu'avez-vous vu dans la rue ? Nous avons vu un cheval qui avait les deux gonoux cassc^. 31 Reading Exercise No. 3. Monsieur Eobert est-il cbez lui? Now, monsieur, Mr. Robert is h« at home No sir il est sorti. Pourriez-vous me dire quawd'^il rewtrera? le is gone out Could you me aay when he will retun» Now, monsieur; mais je ne crois pas qu'il roste longtem^B" No sir . but I ,, believe not that he may remain long time ibsent, A quelle beuro le train part^il? Tl parf^a absent At what o'clock the train starts it It starts »1 oeuf^beures quarante-cmq. N'y a-t-il pas'^?xn'^autre tratw nine o'clock forty five „ There has it not an other train i dix^beures'^et demie? Je ne pourrais vous donnev ce it ten hours and half I not could yea give this rt^wseignement. Gomhien d'argent avez-vous dans voire information How much of money have you in your porte-monnaie? J'ai deux cents f rancs(3) ^en^or ; douze purs* I have two hundred francs in gold twelve francs cinquante centiraes'^en'^argent et qutnze centimes'^ew francs fifty centimes in silver and fifteen centimes in Qionnaie de cuivre. Quelle est la valeur du sbelh'ng en^ coin of copper What is the value of the shilling in argent franpais? II vauf^environ wn franc vt*ngt(ll)-c«wq money Fr^inch It is worth about one franc twenty five centimes. Que desirez-vous'^'acbeter'^aujourd'bui? J'ai centimes What desire you to buy to-day I have besoin d'mi gilet et d'nn pardessus. Ne vous faut-il pas'" need of a waistcoat and of an overcoat „ To you is it necessary not un cbapeau? Non, monsieur; mais je voudrais'^acbetei a hat No sir but I should wish to buy line paire de bottines et 'ine paire de souliers. Que a pair of boots and a pair of shoes Whal faut-il servir h. monsieur? Donnez-moi, s'il vous plait, isit necessary to serve to Mr. Giv* me if it you pleases un potage au tapioca, une cotelette de mouton, des a soup at the tapioca a chop of mutton some pommes de terie frites, et un derni-poulet roti. Avez-vou? potatoes fried and a half chicken roasted llnve you faif^nn bon voyage? Non, le tewp.s(16) n'a pas ete Diade a good journey No the weather has not been favorable. IIier(l7) soir j'ai perdu mow parapluie. favorable Yesterday evening I have lost my umb"»ll» o2 Fourth Lesson. Quatrieme Legon The Article {concluded). The Partitive Article du, de la, de V, des must be used in French before every noun taken in a partitive {*) sense ; some or any is the translation of the partitive article, whicii is ofteD omitted in English. The partitive article is in reality the definite article with the pre- position de (of) and is used in the same manner, viz. : du before a masculine noun singular ) commencing with a de la ,, ,, feminine ,, ,, I consonant de V ,, any noun singular commencing Avith a vowel or h mute des „ ,, ,, plural ; as, — du vin (m.), some ur any wine de la viande (/. ), some or any meat de I'argent (m.), „ ,, money des plumes (J.), ,, „ pens Give me some bread, meat, water, and apples. Donnez-moi du pain, de la viande, de Veau, et des jiomynes. De or c?' takes the place of the partitive article du, de la, de l\ des before a noun in the singular or plural : — 1. After a negation ; as, pas de viande, no or not any meat pas d'oiscaux, no or not any birds 2. After adverbs of quantity (like enough, much, etc.); as — assez dltaile, enough oil comhlen de soldats ? how many soldiers 3. After nouns expressing a quantity, weight, measure, etc. (like a glass, a cup, a pound, a dozen, two yards, etc. ), corresponding here exactly with the the English o/; as, — un verre de vin, a glass of wine une livre de viande, a pound of meat U7ie couple d'oiscaux, a couple of birds 4. This is also generally the case if the noun in French is pieceded by an adjective ; as, de hon vin, (some or any) good wine dejolis oiseaux, (some or any) pretty birds The Auxiliary Verbs avoii , to have, etre, to be. Future. j'aurai, I shall have tu auras, thou wilt have 11, elle aura, Jie, she will have Bous aureus, we shall have vous aurez, you will Jiave ils, elles auront, tJiey will have je serai, I shall he tu seras, thou wilt he il, elle sera, he, she will he nous serous, we sluxll he vous serez, you will be ils, ellea seront, they vnll he (•) The word partitive implios the idea of an iudofinito x>art of anything ; Ex. Givt me tome bread; here some fcrcarf means a part or a portion of broad. Have y]>lcs, mwius : iJuy a quantity (not distinctly mcutiouedj of tea, of collcc, of sugar, and au indeliuito auuibur of apples. ii'6 the apply, la pormne ,, Itoer, la Here ,. tottle, la hout'^ilU ,. bread, le pain ,, coffee, le cafe „ cup, la tass.^ enough, asscz „ glass, le verre how much (how many), comhien' the ink, Vencrcf. „ meat, la viande ,, money, Vargentm. ,, oil, lliuilc f. ,, x>aper, le ])apier the pear, la poir? ,, pound, la lirre ,, salt, le sel ,, sugar, (e auxr* „ tea, le the ,, water, Vea,uf. ,, wine, Ic vln Exercise No. 4. 1. Some (any) bread, — some (any) paper,— some (any) beer, — some (any) meat, — some (nny) money, — some (any) ink, — some (any) books, —some (any) apples, — some coffee, meat, oil, and pears, — paper, ink, an >! pens, — cups, bottles, and glasses, — beer, coffee, and meat, — not any bread , no* beer, — not any money, — no sons, — (some or any) good (6o?t7ie) ink, — (some oj- any) bad (mauvais) tea, — enough wine, — how much sugar* — many {beaucoup) pears, — a glass of water, — a cup of coffee, — a dozen (douzainef.) of chairs, — enougli paper, — some water, — a bottle of beer, — some books, — a pound of salt, — some (any) sugar and bread, — some newspapers, — no tables, — some (any) oil, — no beer, —some children. ^Ve shall have, — shall I have? — he will have, — will they (/.) have ^ • -you will have, — wilt thou have? — will she be? — they will be, — thou wilt be, — will you be ? — 1 shall be, — shall we be ? — I shall not have, — I have not, — shall we not be? — we were not, — you have, — you will not have, — will you be? — we are not, — they will have, — were they (/.)? 2. Achetez^ une livre de sucre et une bouteille de vin. Aurons- nous du cafe? lis n'auront pas de the. Avez-vous de I'encre et dea T)lumes? La mere a assez de poires. Donnez-moi^ un verre de biere. J nurai de bonne {good) huile. Voilii^ de I'eau et du vin. Combien (i'argent a I'ofTicier? Qui a du sel ? Combien de chaises avez-vpus dans .a chnnibre? J'ai de la viande et du pain. Nous avons vu^ des oiseaux ians le jardin. Avez-vous de la biere, du vin, ou du cafe? We shall have some coffee. Officers and soldiers are in the house. Have they any money? Has he any apples and pears, bread and salt? ( ; i ve me^ a cup of coffee and a glass of water. I have not enough sugar. lie has not any bread. How many cups of tea have you? There are^ paper and ink. Has the general any bad (mauvais) horses? The father will be in the garden. Buy^ a bottle of oil and a pound of meat. Have you not any ink ? Has she some pencils? Have you sieen'* any animals^ I have poii.flny beer. There is^ a glass of wine. (*) No as well as not must l)e translated j^as. \ achetez, buy 2 domiez-mni, give nie 3 vinlu, there is, there are 4 vu Be«K French Grammar. 2 34 Questions on Grammar. 1. What is the partitive article in French ? 2. Is the partitive article similar to the definite article ? 3. What words in English are the translation of du, de la, etc. 4. Are these words always expressed in English ? 5. When must the partitive article be used ? 6. What is the meaning of partitive ? 7. How is the partitive article rendered after a negation or an adverb of quantity, or before an adjective ? 8. When is de used instead of the partitive article ? Conversation. What {que) have you in your (the) hand ? I have a pear and some bread in my (the) hand. How much tea did you buy (have you bought (achetd) ? We did not buy any tea, but (mats) we have bought a bottle of wine, two (deux) pounds of meat, some coffee, some ink and some paper. Do you prefer (prifercz-vGUs) a cup of coffee to a glass of Avine ? Thank you, madam ; we prefer {nous pre/eronsj coffee. Have you seen (vu) the uncle's knife '? Yes, madam, I have seen the uncle's knife on the table Who has given (donne) some oil to the little {petit) boy ? I have not given any oil to the boy. What have you done (fait) with (avec) the money ? Wc have bought some apples, some sugar, and some salt. Has the officer's son some pens ? No, sir, he has no pens, but some j)encils. To whom have you given a watch ? { have given a watch to the woman's niece. For whom have you bought a garden ? chave not bought any garden, but we have bouKht a house. Qu'avez-vous dans la main ? J'ai une poire et du pain dans la main. Corabien de the avez-vous achate ? " Nous n'avons pas achete de the, mais nous avons achete une bouteille de vin, deux livres de viande, du cafe, de I'encre et du papier. Freferez-vous une tasse de cafe k un verre dii vin ? Merci, madame; nous preferons du cafe. Avez-vous vu Ic couteau de I'oncle? Oui, madame, j'ai vu le couteau de I'oncle sur la table. Qui a donne de I'huile au petit gargon ? Je n'ai pas donne d'huile au petit gargon. Qu'avez-vous fait avec I'argent ? Nous avons achete des pommes, du Sucre et du sel. Le ills de I'officier a-t-il des plumes ? Non, monsieur, il n'a pas de plumes, mais des crayons. A qui avez-vousdonne une niontre? J'ai donne une montre a la niece de la femme, Pour qui avez-vous achete un jardin ? Nous n'avons pas achete de jardin nnis nous avons achete une in.iison. 35 Reading- Exercise No. 4. Translate this and the following anecdotes. Words which the student has already learnt are omitted and indicated by a . a7id those which are the same or nearly the same in English as in French are indicated by a — ' Esope ct le piiton, Msof . . foot-passenger Esope, le celebre fabuliste, etait tres pauvre. 11 faisait ^sop . celebrated fabulist . very poor . made souverif^^ pied des^excumoTis d'une ville k I'autre. 11 often on foot . — . town . aiiotlier lencontTa. un jour un pieto7i : celui-ci I'arreta et lui dit : met . day . foot passenger this him stopped . to him said " Voudriez-voiis me dire quelle dist :?ice me separe de la Would . — tell what — — separates . ville qui est Hur la colline." Esope prif w?i^air stupide et town which . . . hill iEsop took . — stupid repo?idit : "Vous ii'avez quW marclier, et vous'^y arriverez." answered . „ • ^^^ to walk . . there will arrive L'etranger sourit et dit: "Je sais parfaiteme?it cela ; mais . stranger smiled . said . know perfeetly that but je desireiais savoir comhien de temps il me faudra pour should wish to know . . time . — will be necessary foi faire le chemm." Esope paiut s'offenser et r^peta let make . way ^sop appeared himself to offend . repeated memes paroles. " Cet'^'liomnie n'est pas tout a fait lucide : same words This man „ . . quite lucid il ne me dira lien" pensa le piston ; et il continua sow „ — will tell nothing thought . foot-passenger . . continued his cheimn. Quelques minutes plus tard il entendit qii'o9< way Some — later . heard that one I'appelait : il se retourna et vit'^'Esope que le suivait. him called . himself turned round . saw iEsop . him followt-il "Que me voulez-vous," lui demanda-t-il ? "Je veux vou^ What from me wish . to him demanded . . wish dire, dit^Eaoj)e, que vous serez^a la ville dans'^une heure el to say said -Ssop that . will be . . town . . hour demie." "Et pourquoi ne m'avez-vous pas repondu imm4- a half . why „ me . . . answered inime- diatement." "C'est parce qu'il 6tait necessaire que je visni diately. This beoMuse it , necessary tliai sh'" .^ct coram^iit vous uiaicliiez." how . Wiiikuii 36 Fifth Lessor. Cinquieme Legon. Words wliich are the same or nearly the same in English and French. "Words which are the same, are nearly all nouns or adjectives, ending as follows : in al Ex. : central, filial in asre Ex. in ble )) table, visible in ce M distance, vice in ade ,, serenade, parade in ude ,t habitude, solitude m ag-e in ug-e in ent in ion age, village deluge, refuge prudent, diligent nation, station, commission Remark. — Letters wliich are accented in French drop their accent in English. Words which undergo a slight modification. change that ter- nary mina,tion into aire ory oire ,cy ce English Ity t6 words /ous eux ending \o^xv eur in I or eur ic ^9^^® ive if ^ian ien Ex. solitary — solitaire glory — gloire clemency — clemence charity — charitt pious favour doctor —picux —faveur — docteur comic active — comique — actif historian — historien Many English verbs ending in ise, ize or use, end in French in iser, user. — Examples: realise, realiser; exercise, exercer; abuse, abuser; amuse, amuser. Verbs end- ing in fate Ify change this ending into er fier moderate modify — modirer — modifier Note. — There are few exceptions to the above rules; they will greatly asariut ths student in rapidly acquiring a large number of words. Verbs avoir, to have, and etre, to be. Present Conditional, j'aurais, I should have tu aurais, thou loouldst have il, elh; aurait, he, she would have nous aurions, we should have vous auriez, you would have ils, elles auraicnt, they icoald have je serais, I should he tu serais, thou wouldst be il, elle serait, he, she would be nous serions, we should he vous scricz, you would be ils, elles seraient, they would be 37 SLj^pipentice, apprenti m. ass, d7ie m. boot, boi'tef. cousin, cousin m. cousin(f.), cousinef. day, jour m. foot, pied m. friend, ami m. great, grand here, id large, grand master, maiire m. morning, matin m. pair, paircf. shoe, Soulier m. [m. shoemaker, cordonnier small, petit there, la time, temps (16) m. to-morrow, demain trade, metier m. useful, utile very, tres work, travail m. Exercise No. 5. 1. General("){*) — respectable — conscience — escalade— aptitude— heritage(') — tebrifuge(') — accident — admiration — military — history- decency (')— beauty- -curious— ardour— horror — aquatic — adjective— co- median(') — to idealize(')— to refuse — to accelerate(")— to stupefy (')— moral— anniversary — honorable — captivity — musical — obligatory— Bimilitude -adversary — city— pretenLious(') — to analyse — evidence — (') — firmament— naval- original — capable — inactive — illusion — to mo- derate(') — lion — charitable — calamity — visage — motion— direction — vanity instrument — to indemnize — colonnade — rage — imprudence — notary — civic — notable— adversity. You would have — I should be — would he have ? — they would be — thou wouldst be — I should have— she would not be — we sliould not have — we should be — should we have ? — would you be ? — we should have — thou wouldst have — she would be — he would have — would they ff.J have? — you would be — he would have — we should not be — wouldst thou have? — should I be — we should not be — she would have — they (^to. J would have. 2. Les bottes et les souliers de votre^ ami sont a la station. Nous aurions attendu^ mon^ cousin. Ceci'^ est obligatoire. Cette [this) ca- pitulation serait honorable. Votre action n'est pas charitable. Vous ne seriez pas sur^ le rivage. Seraient-ils dans la cite. Je ne se rais pa.« capable de^ refuser. The instrument is very useful. The boots of the general are in the room. He lias a large foot. This'' would be a great (grande) im- prudence (/.). It would have a great {grande) importance (/".) My'^ friend would be impatient. The shoemaker would not have finished^ the boots. We should have a good master. You would be capable to^** simplify the question. His^^ apprentice was very laborious. Your^^ cousin has a very good trade. You will have a pair of boots and his^^ cousin (/.) a pair of shoes. Would he have the time ? He would not be there. We should be here to-morrow morning. His charity is im- mense. The ass is an animal whi cii" IS very use ful. 1 votre, yours 2 attendu, waited for 3 wioji, my 4 ceci, this bsur, on 6rfe, to Ttliis, oe « my, mon 9 finished, ^/itii 10 to, de 11 liis, son 12 your, votreVd his, sa 14 which, (^lu (*) The apostroplies placed between brackets indicate that as many acute accents are required in the French word. 38 Questions on Grammar. 1. What are the endings which are generally the same ia French as in English? 2. "What becomes of the accents which exist in the French words when such words also exist in the English language? 3. Whnt are the endings which are nearly the same in French as in English? 4. How can French words be formed from English words ending in ary and ory 1 5. How do English words in ty and cy end in French? 6. How can French words be formed from English words ending in ous^ our, or. 7. How do English words ending in ic, ive and ian change those ter- minations ? 8. How do most of the English verbs ending in ise, ize and iLse end in French? 9. How do verbs ending in ate and fy end in French? Conversation. Has the shoemaker an appren- tice? Yes, he has two apprentices in his {soil) worksliop {atelier). Where are the boots? The boots are in my {vu)n) uncle's room. Are the shoes too {trop) small? No. they are rather {■plutdt) too large. Has your (vof.re) cousin a large loot? NTo, his {son) foot is very small. Will the boots be ready {prites) to-morrow morning? Yes, they will be here. What (quel) is your friend's trade (the trade of your friend)? He is (a) shoemaker. Have you two pairs of boots? No, I have only (seulement) one pair of boots ; but (vuiis) I have also {aussi) a pair of shoes. Where is my friend's ass? It is in the garden. Is it (ce) a useful animal? Tfs: it {il) is very useful. jc coraonnier a-t-il un apprenti? Oui, il a deux apprentis dans son atelier. Ou sont Ics bottes? Les bottes sont dans la chambrc de mon oncle. Les souliers sont-ils trop petits? Non, ils sont plutdt trop grands. Votrc cousin a-t-il un grand pied? Non, son pied est tres petit. Les bottes seront-clles pretes de- main matin? Oui, elles seront ici. Quel est le metier de votre ami? II est cordonnier. Avez-vous deux paires de bottes? Non, j'ai seulement (je n'ai qu' ) une paire de bottes ; mais j'ai aussi une paire de souliers. Ou est I'ane de mon ami? II est dans le jardin. Est-ce un animal utile? Oui, il est tres utile. 39 Reading Exercise No. 5. Un de nos'^amis avait besom d'une paire de bottes. our . . need . . ... II alia chez le cordonnier et lui dit : Faites-moi, s'il vous went to , . .to him said make me if . you plait, une paire de bottes, niais je desire qu'elles soient de please .... but I wish . . should be . premiere quality. II faut^aussi que je vous dise quelque first — It is necessary also . . . may say some chose. Je me suis casse une jambe, dans ma jeunesse ; c'est thing . myself broke . leg in my youth this . pourquoi j'ai un pied plus gros que I'autre. Vous devez why ... . larger than . other . must done faire une botte plus large que I'autre. Le cordonnier then make . . wider than . other promit de faire attention et prit mesure. Trois jours^apres promised . to do — . took measure three . afterwards I'apprenti du cordonnier apportait les bottes h, mon^ami ; brought . . . my friend celui-ci les'^essaya immediatement : il mit la plus grande this them tried immediately . put . larger botte au plus petit pied, et ce dernier y e?ttra tres facile- . ' . smaller . . this last there entered very easi- ment. II voulufensuite mettre la plus petite botte au ly . wished afterwards to put . smaller plus grand pied : mais il ne put naturelleme?it pas'^y larger . but . „ could naturally . in it r^ussir. II se facha alors et dit'~'i\ l'appre?iti : Votre succeed . got angry then . said ... maitre ne comprend pas son metier. Je lui avais recom- ,, understands . his . . him . recom- mavAi de faire une botte plus large que I'autre et je trouve mended . to make . . larger than . other . . find tout le contraire : il a fait I'une beaucoup plus'^etroite que all . contrary . . made . . much more narrow than I'autre. Prenez ces bottes et remportez-lcs, al'in qu'il . other take these . . take away them in order that . fce conforme a mes'^instructio?is. himself may conform . my — ■. 4:0 Sixth Lesson. Sixieme Legon, The Adjective. There are two kinds of adjectives : those whicli express some quality belonging to the noun or pronoun to which they refer and are therel'ore called qualifying; and those which de- termine or defme more clearly than the article, and are called determinative. Adjectives are variable words and take the ^render and number of the noun which they qualify or determine. Qualifying" Adjectives. Formation of the FemiiXINe. Rule T. — Adjectives form their feminine by adding e to the masculine; as, — grand, large, graiide; petit, small, j^ctite; joli, pretty, jo lie; aise, ea.sj, aisee Rule II. — Adjectives ending in « mute remain the same in the feminine ; as, modeste, modest, modeste; fidble, faithful, /(^^Ze Rule III. — Adjectives ending in on, an, et, el, eil, ieuy double the final consonant and add an e; as, bon, good, bonne; paysan, peasant, paysanne; muet, dumb muette; iternel, eternal, eternelle ; j^areil, alike, pareille ; Chretien^ christian, chretienne Exceptions. — co7;ipZe<, complete; concret, concrete; discret, dis- creet ; inquiet, uneasy ; rej^let, stout ; secret, secret, form their feminine by putting a grave accent on the e before the t, and adding an e to the masculine; thus: complete, discrete, inquire, &c. Rule IV. — Adjectives ending in x change x into se; as, heureux, happy, heureuse; jaloux, jealous, jalouse Exceptions. — doux, sweet, douce; roux, reddish, rousse; faux, false, fausse; vieux^ old, vieille. Rule V. — Adjectives ending in / change / into ve; as, neuf, new, Tieuve; adif, active, active Rule VI. — Adjectives ending in er change er into ere; as, Jlcr, Yivoud, Jiire; premier, first, premiere; singulier, singular, sing al lire The Auxiliary Verbs avoir, to have and Hre, to be. Fast Indrfinite. (Compound tenses in French are formed with the tenses of an auxiliary verb and the past participle). J'ai eu, I have had J'ai ete, I have been tu as eu, thoii hast had il, elle a eu, lie, she has had nous avons eu, we have had vous avoz eu, you have had ils, elles ont eu, they have had tu as ete, thou hast been il, elle a ete, he, she has been nous avons etc', we have been vous avez ete, you have been ils, elles ont ete, they have been 41 advice, avis m alone, seul anxious, anxieux bad, mauvais courageous, courageux embarrassment, cmhar- good, hon [ras in. ' andwiitmg, ecrituref. hard, dur honest, honnUe impossible, impossible lame, boiteux last, dernier misfortune, infortunef. neighbour, voisin m. news, nouvelle f. no, non old, vieux person, personnef. positive, positif prudent, /;?'itc?<5?zf small, petit too, trap town, villef. Exercise No. 6. Write the feminine of the following adjectives. 1. Patient — savant — egal — obtus — renomme — ardu — hardi — agreste — mignon — coquet — solennel — vermeil — ^payen — secret — audacieux — doux — recreatif — dernier — rond — malade — sujet — obstine — fameux — faux — opulent — inactif — vieux — content — dur — lourd — actuel — facile — net — vertueux — roux — reserve — comique — laborieux — serein — com- plet — droit — triste — naturel — ^boiteux — habile — lent — religieux — plein — ^juste — ancien — liberal — vicieux — discret — incline — intelligent. We have been — I have not had — they (/.) have been — ^have we had ? — I have not been — ^he has not had — we have not had — thou hast had — he has had — thou hast been — have you not had ? — you have not liad — have they {m. ) had? — has she been? — have they (/. ) had? — you have been — have I not been? — ^liave we had? — have they (m.) not been? — they (w.) have been — we have not been. 2. La maison est grande. La ville est petite. Ma^ m^re etait seule. J'ai ete prudente. Nous avons eu le courage. Sa^ sceur est boiteuse. Cette^ chambre ne serait pas trop grande. Elle a ete genc- reuse(*). Cette' ville est tr^ vieille. La nouvelle est positive. Son* ecriture est tres mauvaise. Cette personne etait tres honnete. Mon* ecriture n' etait pas bonne. II est impossible (de) refuser un avis k notre^ voisin dans son* embarras et dans son infortune La derniere nouvelle est bonne. Ceiie viande est dure. Cette personne est tr^ discrete. She has been happy. My'' room is not very large. He had had patience. This^ woman is old. Our^ sister is good. His^° misfortune is great. This^ person is anxious to see^^ the town. My mother was alo le in her^^ large room. This handwriting is very bad. You have been prudent (/.) in your^^ advice. She was very courageous in her^* mbarrassments. The news is too positive. The old woman is lame. Is this^ person honest and discreet ? (*) Some adjectives wliicli are not found in the vocabulary must be looked for on the opposite page. 1 ma, my 2 sa, his 3 cette, this 4 son, his 5 mon, my 6 notre, our 7 my. ma S this, cette 9 our, notre 10 his, son 11 to see, de voir 12 her, aa 13 your, V03 14 her, ses 42 Questions on Grammar. ITow many kinds of adjectives are there in French ? What is the difference between qualifyingand determinative adjectives? How do adjectives agree with the nouns they qualify or determine ? How do adjectives form their feminine in French? How do adjectives ending in e mute form their feminine ? "What are the endings of adjectives which double their final consonant in the feminine? Give the adjectives in et which form their feminine by changing that (Tiding into He? How do adjectives ending in x form the feminine? Give the exceptions to the above rule. How do adjectives ending in / form the feminine? How do adjectives ending in er form the feminiuo ? Conversation. Who (qui) has written (ecrit) this (cetfe) ](>tter? My {man) friend has written the letter. To whom has tliis letter been (e7e) written (ecrite)1 It {ellc) has been written to my fatiier. Is the liandwriting o{' yom {voire) friend very bad 'i No, it is very good. Is it possil)le to write {d'ecrirc) a letter with {avec) this bad pen ? No, it (c') is impossible. Is it {il) possible that the old shoe- maker should come (vieniie) to- morrow? It (ce) would be possible if (5') he were {etait) not lame. Have you seen (vu) this news in the last newspaper? Yes, I have seen the news in the newspaper Avhich (que) the postman {factcur) brought (a apporte) this (ce) morning. Is the news positive? Ves, it {elk) is quite {tout a fait) true {vraie). >ui a ecrit cette lettre? Mon ami a ^crit la lettre. A qui cette lettie a-t-elle et6 ecrite ? Elle a ete ecrite a pere. L'ecriture do votre ami est-elle tres mauvaise ? Non, elle est tres bonne. Est-il possible d'ecrire une lettre avec cette mauvaise plume? Non, c'est impossible. Est-il possible que le vieux cor- donnier vienne demain ? Ce serait possible s'il ii'etait pas boiteux. Avez-vous vu cette nouvelle dans le dernier journal ? Oui, j'ai vu la nouvelle dans le journal que le iacteur a apporte ce matin. La nouvelle est-elle positive? Oui, elle est tout a fait vraie. 43 Reading Exercise No. 6. tTw^homme avait regu une lettre et voulait^y repondre . received . . . wished to it to answer Pour sow malheur il ne pouvait pas'^eciire et il se trouva liis misfortune . ,, could . write . . himself found dans re7ttbarras. II alia voir un de ses vois^)^s et lui . embarrassment . went too see . . his . . him demawda conseil. '*Allez chez notre vieux sacristatJi" lui asked . go to . . sexton toliim dit le voisin; "il ecrit souvcwt des lettres pour d'autres said . . . writes often . . . . other gens." L'homnie suivit son'^'avis, alia chez le sacrista/y* people . . followed his advice went to . sexton et lui expliqua son'^'eTObarras. " Je suis faclie de ne pas . him explained his embarrassment . . sorry of „ pouvoir ecrire votre lettre" repoudit le feacristam; "je to be able to write your . answered . sexton suis boiteux." L'liomme fut'~'etonne. " Vous'^etes boiteux." astonished . . , dit-il, *'et cela vous'^empeche d'ecrire ma lettre I ecrivez- said . . that you prevents . to -write my . write vous done avec le pied?" "Non," repliqua le sacristaiw then with . . no replied . sexton "j'ecris^avec la main; mais moii^eoriture est si mauvaise . write with . . but my . .so que je puis seul la lire. Les gews^etaient^obligesdem'en- that . can . it read . people . obliged . me to voyer chercher pour que je lusse les lettres que j'avais send fetch for that I should read. . which . ecrites. Maintenant, comme je suis paralyse, il m'est written now as . . paralyzed .tome . impossible d'aller tronver ceux qui ont relaintifF&c., although derived from present participles, have for their ibminines vengeresse, enchanter esse, pecheresse and demanderesse. EuLE YIII. — Adjectives ending in erieur form their fem- inine by the simple addition of e to the masculine ; as, snperieur, superior, supdrieure; inf&rieur, inferior, infirieure Remark. — Majeur, major; mineur, minor and meilleur, better follow the same rule. HuLE IX. — Adjectives ending in teur not derived from present participles form their feminines by changing teur into trice ; as, admirateur, admirer, admiratrice ; createur, creator, creatrice Rule X. — Adjectives in au and ou form their feminines by changing au into elle, and ou into olle; as, heaii, beautiful, belle; nouveau, new, nouvelle ; nnou, soft, vxolle Remark. — beau, nouveau, mou, fou (mad) and ^-icwx become bel^ cuvel, mol, fol and vieil before a masculine noun beginning with a )wel or mute h. Rule XI. — The following adjectives double the final con- sonant and add an e to the masculine : iiul void nulU I gros large grosse i epais thick epaisse $()t silly sotte gras fat grasae las tired lasse gcntil nice gentille \ has low basse ' exprhs express expresse Rule XII. — The following adjectives are irregular : aigu* acute axgne frais fresh fraiche tec dry scche blanc white Manche franc frank franche tiers tliird tierce long long longue public public puhlique caduG decrepit ca'/wgwe hire Turkish hirgue grcc Greek grccque hebreu Hebrew hebraique favori favorite favorite dcvin guesser devineresi malin malicious maligne Unin benign h^.nigne coi still coite fraUre treacherous traitresse Present Indicative of the verb dormer^ to giv (First Conjugation, including all verbs ending in er. ) ye donn-e,(t) T give donne-je, do I give? tu donn-es, thou givest donnes-tu, dost thoio give il donn-e, he gives donne-t-il, does he give nous donn-ons, we give donnops-nous, do we give? vous donn-ez, you give donnez-vous, do you give? ils domi-eut, they give donnent-ils, do tliey give? jo ne donne pas, T do not give tune donnes pas, thou dost not — il ne donne pas, lie does not — nous ne donnons pas,if c do not — vous nedonnez pas, youdonot— ils ne donnentpas, they do not— (*) All ad^jectives ending in gu take the direresis on the e (e) in the feminine. (i) The endings have been separated fron* the root by a hyphenand must be placea after the root of any verb of the same coiijugatimi ; as,— je parl-e, I speak ; tu march-es, thou walkost; il cliant-e, he sings, ie. 45 answer, reponsef. clever, habile cow, vachef. doctor, docteur m. dress, rohef. exercise, exercice m. gentleman, monsieur \ red, rouge health, sanUf. \ song, chanson f. ill, inalade lady, dame f. lesson, le(^onf. nothing, rien physician, medecin m. j pretty, joli quick, vite to-day, aujourd'hui to like, to love, aimt to sing, chanter to speak, parler to walk, marcher visit, visile f. well. Men with, avec Exercise No. 7. Write the feminine of ihe following adjectives. 1. Rieur — interieur — generateur — jumeau — fou — reclamenr — , en- genr — majeur — consolateur — beau — sot — blanc — aigu — malin — nul — frais — caduc — contigu — enchanteur — gentil — ^joueur — expres — sec — benin — gros — favori — niineur — mou — las — gras — ^blanc — ^pecheur — epais — franc — public — devin — meilleur — has — ambigu — nouveau-long. We give — do I give? — you do not give — do they (/.) give? — he gives — thou givest — they (/. ) do not give — it (/. ) gives — does he give ? — I speak — we like — I give — do we give ? — they (m. ) do not give — do you give? — I do not give — you give — she walks — they (/.) sing — she does not give — do we speak ? — they (m. ) give — doest thou give ? — do they (m. ) give ? — we do not give — do they (m. ) sing ? — she gives — she likes. 2. La dame a eu une visits. Le medecin parle bien. "Vous mar- chez vite. Mon^ pere donne une robe^D blanche^ h ma- petite cousine. Ma voisine est la soeur^ jumellea de ce^ monsieur. Donnez-vous une meilleure pomme k votre^ frere ? Je ne donne pas la grosse poire an petit garQon. Avez-vous une vache& grassed ? Nous chantons au- jourd'hui. Donnent-ils leurs^ exercices au professeur? Qu'^avez-vous dans votre main ? — Rien. Leur*^ vache est malade. Elle chants bien. We sing to-day with your^ sister. My° cousin walks very quickly. My^* dress is white and red. They (m. ) give some large apples to the little girl. She was a great friend of my^" aunt. This^^ is my favorite^(*J songfi- Her^2 answer was ambiguous. Do you give this^^ long lesson to the little boy? This^^ girl is very clever. You speak well. The lady is ill ; she has received^^ the visit of the physician. My^^ mother gives these^^ apples and these pears to the little boy and to the pretty little girl. (*) i..a indicate that the word marked a must be placed before the word marked 5. 1 mon, my 2 ma, my 3 ce, this 4 voire, your 5 leurs, their 6 qu', what 7 leur, their 8 your, voire 9 my, mon 10 my, ma 11 this, c' 12 her, sa 13 this. cette 14 received, regit 15 my, ma 16 tliese, ces 46 Questions on Grammar. How do adjectives ending in eur derived from present participles form the feminine ? Give the adjectives which change eur into eresse in the feminine. Which are the adjectives ending in eur wliich form the feminine by adding e, to the masculine ? How do adjectives ending in teur, not derived from present participles, form the feminine ? How do adjectives in axL and on form the feminine ? Give the forms used instead of &mw, nouveau, mou^fou and vieux before masculine nouns beginning with a vowel or a mute h. Give the feminine of gentil, gros, gras, 6pais, sot, mil. Give the feminine of frais, sec, hlanc, long, public, favori, malin. What is the sign which must be placed on the final e of the feminine form of adjectives ending in gu in tlie masculine ? Conversation. Where {ou) is the lady ? | The lady is in the room with the physician. Is she ill? No {non); but {mats) she wishes (disire) to have his {son) advice on [sur) the health of her {sa) daughter. Is the doctor clever ? Yes ; a gentleman told me [rrCa dit) that he was very clever. Do you like the dress of this [cette) little girl ? Yes, I like?) it^t (Z') (very) much {heaucoup). Do you walk quickly ? No, I do not walk very quickly. Have you seen [vu my {mon) neighbour's cow? Yes, it is very [)retty ; it is brown and white. Have you received {re<;iL) an an- swer from your brother ? Yes, sir ; he is in very good health. Is he always {totifoiirs) with your (voire) sister in the country (d la. campagne) ? No, he is alone now. Ou est la dame ? La dame est dans la chambre avec lemedecin. Est-elle malade ? Non, mais elle desire avoir son avis sur la sante de sa fille. Le docteur est-il habile ? Qui ; un monsieur m'a dit qu'il etait tres habile. Aimez-vous la robe de cette petite fille? Oui ; je I'aime beaucoup. Marchez-vous vite ? Non, je ne marche pas tres vite. Avez-vous vu la vache de mon voisin ? Oui, elle est trfes jolie ; elle est brune et blanche. Avez-vous re9U une reponse de votre frfere ? Oui, monsieur; il est en tres bonne sante. Est-il toujours avec votre sceur a la campagne ? Non, 11 est seul maintenant. 47 Reading Exercise No. 7. Qne dame avaif^un soin exager^ de sa aant6. EUe a care exaggerated . her ^tait dans la plus grawde inquietude, an sujet de la plus greatest uneasiness on the subject . . most legere indisposition et envoyaif^immediatement cherclier slight — . sent immediately to fetch Ic docteur. Ce ni^decin 4tait^wn'~'homme tres habile et — this . . . , . clever . avait conseqiieming?it'^uiie grande clientele. II lui 6tait consequently . . practice . to him done tres desagmible d'etre derang^ inutilement de ses'^ then . disagreeable . to be disturbed uselessly from his antres'^occupations. II resolut de corriger cette dame de other — . resolved to correct sa manie. Un jour qu'elle avait remarqu6 une taclie rouge her mania . . that . . remarked . spot sur sa main, elle le fif^aussitof^appeler. II vint, regarda on her . . him made at once call . came looked at la main et dit : " vous'^avez tr^s hien fait de me faire venir , said . . . well done of — to make come aujourd'hui." La dame fut"^epouvantee en I'mtendant frightened on him hearing parler'^ainsi et lui deiuanda si elle 6tait da?igereuseme?it speak thus . him asked if . . dangerously malade. "Pas le moim du monde," r^pondit le docteur. least . world answered . — "Mais si vous'^aviez'~'atte?idu jusqu'^ demam, la tache but if . . waited till to-morrow . spot aurait certainenieTit di.-5paru sans mon traitement et j'aurais certainly disappeared without any treatment perdu le prix de cette visite." La dame comprit probable- lost . . . this visit . . understood probably uient la le§on, car le medecin, aprfes'^avoir racont^ cette for . . after . related this anecdote, ajoutait que la dame ne I'avait jamais fait'" - added that . ,, him . never made appeler, depuis ce jour-1^, sinon lorsqu'elle ^tait reelleme^it call since that . there but when . . really malade. 48 Eighth Lesson. Huitieme Lecon. Qualifying Adjectives (continued). Formation of the Plural. KuLE. — Adjectives form tlieir plural according to the rules given for nouns. (Lessons 1, 2 & 3.) Exception 1. — Adjectives ending in eu take s in the plural instead of taking an x ; as, — hleu, blue, hleus ; feit, defunct, feus 2. — The following adjectives ending in al take s in the plural instead of changing aHnto aux ; they are very seldom used in the plural. fatal fatal I glacial glacial I natal natal final final j jovial jovial | naval uaval and a few others very little used. Degrees of Comparison. There are three degrees of comparison of adjectives : the positive, the comparative and superlative. The positive is the adjective itself, without any comparison between the noun which it qualifies and any other noun ; as, cet homme est pauvre, this man is poor The comparative is the degree which indicates that a com- parison is made between the object qualified by the adjective and one or several other objects of the same kind. Comparatives arss, aussi, as, before the adjectives. cet homme est phis gen^reux que moi, this man is more generous than I cet homme est moins glnereux que moi, this man is less generous than I cet homme est aussi genereux que moi, this man is as generous as I It may be seen from these examples that than, as well as as, at the beginning of the second term of the comparison is translated que. The superlative is the degree which indicates that the object qualified by the adjective possesses the quality in a very high degree (superlative absolute) or in the highest degree [superlative relative). The superlative absolute is formed by placing tres, fort or bien, very before the adjective ; as, cet homme est tres pauvre, this man is very poor The superlative relative is formed by placing the article U, la, les before the comparative ; as, cet homme est Ic phis genereux, this man is the most generous les homines les plus sages, the wisest men Imperfect of the verb downer, to give. Je donn-ais, I gave or I was giving tu donn-ais, thoi/, gavest 11 donn-ait, he gave nous donn-ioiis. we gave vous donn-iez, you gave ils donn-aient, they gave donnais-j e, did I give or was I giving donnais-tu, didst thou give donnait-il, did he give doiinions-nous, did we give donniez-vous, did we give donnaient-ils, did they give "beautiful, heau blue, bleu coat, habit m. del)t, dettef. end, bout m. fnf. fsLiuilj, famine/, ^ower, Jleur f. glove, gant m. 49 Londou, Londres m. month, mois m. new, nouveau painter, pcintre m. painting, tableau in. perfect, imrfait poor, pauvre ribbon, ruhan m. rich, riclie soon, bientot sound, son m. sum, somine f. tall, grand to give, donner wide, Zarg^e young, jeune Exercise No. 8. 1. The tall^ men^ — the tall& women^ — the beautiful flowers — someblue^ coats* — someblue^ dresses" —the beautiful gardens — the nasal ?> sounds" — a larger street— the largesthouse— a wide& river" — the widest^ rivers" — a more intelligent^ gentleman"— some more intelligent^ ladies" — a very rich^ friend^— some verj^ old hats — the bad debts — the poor^ families" — some beautiful flowers — some richer^ men". He gave — we did not give — did I give ? — she did not give — ^he sang— did we give ? — thougavest — he hid not give — you did not sing — they (m.) walked — they (m.) did not sing — we gave— didst thou give?— did you speak ? — you did not give — did he give ? — I gave— we walked — did you give ?— they (/.) did not give— I spoke — you gave — did she speak? — they (m.) gave — thou didst not give — did tbey (/.) give? — I did not give. 2. Le peintre a cnvoye^ de trfes beaux tableaux k mon^ ami. Ma^ soeur aime les rubans bleus. Les nouveaux regiments ont des habits rouges. Mon- pere a des chevaux moins beaux que les v6tres.* Les maisons de la nouvelle rue sont tres belles. Les rues du nouveau Paris 801 it plus larges que les rues de Londres. Les fleurs de votre^jardin sout d'une parfaite beaute. Mes^ fr^res donnaient (des) avis h, leurs" am.is. Les couteaux que^ vous donniez a mes*' soeurs etaient aussi bons que les miens. ^ Donniez- vous dcis^*' fleurs k mon^ ami. He will pay^^ his^- debts at the end of the month. These^^ flowers will soon'!' "be" perfect. These^^ paintings are less beautiful than those. ^^ My^'' brother is as rich as L^'' My^^ father was the tallest of the family. The sounds of my^^'' instrument are more beautiful than those.^* Lon- don is larger than Paris. These^^ gentlemen^'' are very rich. The songs which^^ he sang were very pretty. We did not give any blue& ribbonsa to the youngest girl. She will pay this^^ sum^ soon". They (m) gave their^*^ old coats to the poor. These^^ gloves are less pretty than those. " This^i painter is very young. 1 envoys, sent 2 mon, my 3 ma, my 4 les vdtres, yours 5 voire, your, 6 mes, my 7 leurs, their 8 que, which 9 les miens, mine 10 des, any 11 will pay, patera 12 his, ses 13 these, ces 14 those, ceux-ld 15 my, 7non 16 I, moi 17 gentlemen, messieurs 18 which, qu' 19 this, cette 20 their," le^irs, 21 this, ce. 60 Questions on Grammar. 1. How do adjectives form the plural? 2. How do adjectives ending in eu form the plural? 3. Give some adjectives ending in al which take s wlien used in the plural. 4. How many degrees of comparison are there in adjectives? 5. Give an example of an adjective used in the positi ve ? 6. What does the comparative of an adjective indicate? 7. How are comparatives formed in French ? 8. What does the superlative indicate? 9. How is the superlative absolute of an adjective formed in French 10. How is the superlative relative formed in French ? Conversation. Where does the painter live (demeure) ? The painter lives in the new street. Has the painter finished (Jini) your (voire) portrait ? Yes, it is (c'est) a very good paint- ing. In which {quelle) room is your portrait? It is {il est) in my father's room. When [quand) will you be in {d) London? I shall be& thereo (y) at the end of the month. Will yoti be in Parish soon" ? I shall be there in twelve [douze) days and your brother in a month. Are his {ses) ribbons blue or red? They are blue, white {blancs) and red. He will pay (jyaiera) a large sum of money to my father. How much will he pay? Two thousand (deuxmille) francs. Is he richer than you ? No, I am much (bcaucoup) richer than he {lui). Ou demeure le peintre ? Le peintre demeure dans la nou- velle rue. Le peintre a-t-il fini votre portrait? Qui, c'est un tres bon tableau. Dans quelle chambre est votre portrait ? II est dans la chambre de mon pere. Quand serez-vous a Londres? J'y serai k la fin du mois. Serez-vous bientdt k Paris ? J'y serai dans douze jours et votre frere dans un mois. Sesrubanssont-ils bleus ou rouges? lis sont bleus, blancs et rouges. II paiera uno grosse somme d'iu- gent a mon pere. Combien paiera-t-ill Deux mille francs. Est-il plus riche que vous? Non, je suis beaucoup plus riche que lui. 51 Reading Exercise No. 8. ZJn'^liomiiie, tres riclie mais^aussi avare que riclie, but . miserly desiranf^avoir sow portrait, s'adressa a wn'^artiste de wishing . his — himself addressed . . — talent et lui promit de le payer genera iisemewt si le — . him promised of him to pay generously if portrait etait d'une ressemblawce satisfaisawte. Le pemtre — ... resemblance satisfactory . painter se mif^a I'ouvrage et, au bout de quelques mois, il avait^ himself put . . .... some acheve un tableau qui ne laissait rieii^h desirer, ni pour finished . . which „ left nothing . desire neither le fini du travai7, ni pour la ressemblcmce qui etait parfaite. . finishing , . nor . . resemblance which . perfect Mais I'original essaya d'obtenir une diminutiow sur le prix but . — tried of to obtain . — on . . convenu, et voyant que I'artiste etait resolu a ne pas ceder, agreed . seeing . . artist . resolute . „ . to yield ilr lui declara qu'il pouvait garder son tableau : car il se . him declared . . could keep his . for .to himself disait que, ne pouvawt le vewdre a personno, le pewtre said . not being able it to sell . nobody serait bien^'oblige de le lui donner me«7Zeur marche. Que well obliged to it him . cheaper what fit le peintre? II fit'^'eHcadror le portrait, y mif^une did. . painter , made frame . — on it put inscription : " je suis^ici parce que je ne paie pas mes — . . here because . „ pay . my dettcs," et le plaga au-dessus de la porte de sa maison; . it placed above ... . his Or, I'original etait connu de tout le monde et bientot^il now . — . known . all . world . soon etait devenu la risee de la ville entiere. Alors le Croesus become . derision . . . entire Then . — ne put resister au ridicule et se hata de payer la somme not could resist . — . himself hastened to pay qu'il avait refusee auparavctnt. which. . refused before 62 Ninth Lesson. Neuvieme Lecon, Qualifying' Adjectives (concluded). Degrees of Co:\[parisok of Adjectives (concluded). There are three adjectives in French which form their comparatives and superlatives irregularly, viz: ban good moilleur better le meilleur the best wawvaw bad pire worse U pirG the worst l->etit Httle, small moindre less, smaller U moindre the smallest The corresponding adverbs are also irregular in the for- mation of their comparatives and superlatives ; Men well mieux better le viieux the best mal badly pis worse le 2?is the worst peu little moins less le moins the least Eemark 1. — The regular comparatives and superlatives of mai*- vais, petit and mal are also used. Ex.: ce pain-ci est plus mauvais que V autre, this bread is worse than the other ce livre est le plus petit, this book is the smallest il ecrit plus mal que moi, he writes worse than I 2. It must be noticed that meilleur and mieux are both translated better; pire and^jis, petit a.nd peu, 'tnoindre and moins also translate the same English words worse, little and less. In order to know when he has to use either of these words, the student must refer to the definitions of the parts of speech. Meilleur, pire, petit and moindre are adjectives and consequently must be be used when better, v)orse, little and less qualify nouns. Ex. : ce p)ain est meilleur que le v6tre, this bread is better than yours ce livrc-ci est pire que celui-ld, this book is worse than that cet endroit est plus petit que cehd-ld, this place is smaller than that mo?i chapeau est petit, my hat is small Mieux, pis, peu and moins are adverbs and will be used when better, >rorse, little and less determine verbs, adjectives or adverbs. \l.x. : il lit mieux que moi, he reads better than I il chante plus mal que son frere, he sings worse than his brother il parle peu, he speaks little nous voyageons moins souvent que vous, we travel less often than you Place op Adjectives. The place of adjectives in French is generally after the nouns. However some adjectives, principally those which are • if one or two syllables, like ban, grand, beau, joli, petit, mau- vais are placed before the noun. As a rule, the longer word is placed last. Future of the Verb donner, to give (continued). je donn-erai, I shall give donnerai-je, shall I give in donn-eras, thou wilt giv, donneras-tu, wilt thou give il donn-era, he will give donnera-t-il, will he give nous donn-erons, we shall give donnerons-nous, shall we give vous donn-erez, you will give donnerez-vous, will you give ils donn-erout, they loill give donneront-ils, will they give 53 bed, lit m. business, affaire f. care, souci m. clerk, commis m. climate, climat m. contented, content country, pays m. dish, plat m. grape, raism m. gun, ficsil m. ]oy,joief. joyful, joyeux kind, espece f. I laziness, paresscf. milk, lait nn. ' o'clock, heuref. parcel, paquet m. reason, raisonf. salary, salaire m. thing, chose f. to eat, manger to find, trouver vice, vice m. workman, ouvricr m. Exercise No. 9. 1. A better dish — the best milk — a worse climate — the worst weather — a smaller book — the least care — he speaks better — you sing the best — she dances badly — she sings worse — he sings the best — I walk little — we speak less — they (m. ) walk the least — the best workmen — a better gun — the best dish — a smaller bed — 1 eat very little. We shall give — will you give? — ^he will not give — I shall walk — shall we sing? — he will love — thou wilt give — shall I give ? — we shall not give — will he speak? — will he give? — you will not give — I shall give — will you sing? — he will walk — I shall not give — will you walk? — you will give — will they (/.) give ? — wUt thou give? — they (m.) will not give — she will not sing — he will give — they (w. ) will give — shall we give ? — thou wilt not give — ^we shall not speak. 2. Nous donnerons la meilleure plume h. votre^ fils. II donnera la plus mauvaise pomme a son^ frere. II sera content de* la moindre chose. II avait un^ des meilleurs chevaux. II est de la pire espece. II mange pen. Vous donnerez moins k votre^ voisin. II chante le mieux de tous^ ses^ amis. Cet'^ oiseau mange moins que le nStre^. La paresse est le pire de tous^ les vices. Cette'' maison est plus petite que la v8tre^°. Je donnerai le meilleur de mes^^ fusils a mon^^ cousin. Nou.- marcherons moins domain qu'aujourd'hui. Get'' enfant est tr^s petit. He was better than his^' brother She will dance less in that^^ town She will not speak to your^^ The appl cousm. Hi She will sing better to-morrow She spoke little of that^^ business. "Will you speak a little with me^^ ? I shall give less to my^'' new clerk. The apples are better in your country. He will give his^^ best grapes to our^^ uncle. His^^ reasons are worse than ever-*'. His^^ bed is better than mine^^. This^^ work, man had the least salary. "We shall eat little : the least thing will be sufficient'-''^. This-^ parcel is very small. He gives less tlian I-^. Give me26 some better wine. vctre, your 2 son, his 3 de, with 4 un, one 5 tous, all 6 ses, his 7 cet, this 8 le ndtre, P'lr? 9 cette, this 10 Je, la votre, yours 11 mcs, my 12 mon, my 13 his. sou 14 that, cette 15 me. moi 16 your, votre 17 my^ inon 18 his, ses IC owr, notri, 20 Qycv,, jamais 21 mine, Je mien. 22 this,'(^ei 23 will be sufficient, su^ra 24 this oe 25 I. vwi 26 give me, donncz-nioi. 64 Qu<=^stions on Grammar. 1. What are the thiee French adjectives which lorui tueir comparativee and superlatives irregularly ? 2. Give the comparatives of those three adjectives? 3. What are the three adverbs which are irregular in the formatiop ^f their comparatives and superlatives? 4. Give the superlative of those three adverbs ? 5. What are the adjectives and adverbs of which the regular forms of comparatives and superlatives can also be used? 6. What are the English words which are both adjectives and adverbs and are translated by two different words in French ? 7. When must meiUeur, pire, petit and moindre be used ? 8. When must mieux, pis, peu and moins be used ? 9. What is generally the place of adjectives in French ? 10. What are the adjectives which are placed before the nouns? Conversation. Where did you find this parcel? found this parcel in the street. Where was it ? It was before (devant) the door of my (mon) father's house. Was the money upon (su7-) the bed ? No ; it was upon the table. Is your {voire) father's clerk con- tented with (de) his (son) salary? Yes ; he is very contented. What (qu') have you eaten at dinner (diner)? I have eaten some meat, some bread, apples and grapes. Wliy (pourquoi) is the workman so (si) joyful? Br "luse ho has earned (gagne) a good salary. At what (quelle) o'clock will you eat this evening? At six (six) o'clock, if (si) my father has (est) arrived (arrive). Will vour brother bo here (icijf I hope (esphre) so (que oui • Ou avez-vous trouve ce paquet? J'ai trouve ce paquet dans la rue. Ouetait-il? II etait devant la porte de la maison de mon pk-e. L'argent etait-il sur le lit ? Non ; il etait sur la table. Le commis de votre pere esL-il content de son salaire? Oui ; 11 est tres content. Qu'avez-vous mange a diner? J'ai mange de la viande, du pain, lies pommes et des raisins. Puurquoi I'ouvrier est-il si joyeux ? Parcequ'il a gagne un bon salaire. A quelle heure mangerez-vous ce 6oir? A si>: hcures, si mon pere est ar- rive. Votre fr6re sera-t-U ici .' J'espere que oui 55 Reading Exercise No. 9. Un^oiwiiev avait deux fils: Vun d'enx'^etait un^enfani two . the one . them hon et diligent qui se levait tous les matms a six'^heures ; — who himself raised all . . at six Tautre, qui etait paresseux, restait daws sow lit jusqu'a . other who . lazy remained . his . until dix'^heures. Un matz'w Venfant Jaborieux trouva deva?it ten . .... — found before la porte de la maisow un paquet contenawt dix^ecus; et containing ten crowns naturellemewt il en fut tres joycux et apporta I'argewf^a naturally . ofit . . . . brought SOW pere, qui partagea sa joie. Celui-ci alia directemewf" his . who shared his . this one went directly a la cliambre de ses'^ewfawts et y trouva le paresseux qui . . . . his . . there found . lazy who etaif^ewcore couclie. II Yevetllsi, lui mowtra I'argewf^et still laid down . him awoke him showed . money lui dit: "Regarde ce que tow frere a trouve daws la rue. him said look that wliicJi thy . . found Mais pourquoi est-il si lieureux ? c'cst parce qu'il se leve but why . . so happy this is because . himself raises cliaque mat/w a six^lieures. Tu ne trouveras jamais riew every . . six . • ,. wilt find never nothing de semblable, puisque, a dix'^heures, tu es'^'cwcore daws of similar since . ten . . . still tow lit." Le jeune gargow qui n'etait pas^^KCore parf.iite- tliy . . . . who ,, . . yet perfect!} mewt Teyeille, se frotta les yeux'^et repowdit : " Vout: awaken to himself rubbed . . . answered avez tout a fait raihow, mow pere, et je ne vous cowtredirai altogether right my . . . „ you shall contradict pas. Mais, ne croyez-vous pas que celui qui a perdu le but „ believe ... he who . lost paquet qui cowtenait son'^argewt aurait blew mieux fait de which contained his . . much . done to rfister comine moi daws sow lit. II serait plus riclie de remain like nic . his . • . . , . dix'^ecus." ten crowns 56 Tenth Lesson. Dixieme Legon. Determinative Adjectives. Numeral Adjectives. Numeral adjectives are of two kinds : the Cardinal Numeiai adjectives and the Ordinal. Cardinal Numeral Adjectives. Cardinal Numeral adjectives merely indicate the quantity; aa vingt Jiommes, twenty men ; trente-six livres, thirty-six books . They are called Cardinal because they are the principal, tho.-^e from which others are derived. 1 Uh, one 2 Deux, two 3 Trois, three 4 Quatre, four 5 Cinq, five 6 Six, six 7 Sept, seven 8 Unit, eight 9 Neuf, nine 10 Dix, ten 11 Onze, eleven 12 Doiize, twelve 13 Treize, thirteen 14 Quatorze, fourteen 15 Quinze, fifteen 16 Seize, sixteen 17 Dix-sept, seventeen 18 Dix-huit, eighteen 19 Dix-ncuf, nineteen 21 Vingt et un, twenty -one 22 Vingt deux, twenty-two 23 Vingt trois, twenty-three, &c. 30 Trente, thirty 31 Trente et un, etc. , thirty-one, &c. 40 Quarante, forty 50 Cinquante, fifty 60 Soixante, sixty 70 Soixante-dix, seventy 71 Soixante ct onze, seventy-one 72 Soixante-douze, seventy-two &c. 80 Quatre-vingt, eighty 81 Quatre-vingt-un, eighty-one, &c. 90 Quatre-vingt- dix, ninety 91 Quatre-vingt-onze, ninety-one 92 Quatre-vingt-douze, ninety- two&c 100 Cent, one hundred 101 Cent-ion, onehundredandone, &c 1000 Mille, one thousand 1,000,000 tin million, one million 20 Vingt, twenty Remarks — 1. Cardinal numbers are invariable except quatre-vingt, eighty, and cent, hundred, multiplied by another number, when not followed by another number. — Ex. : quatre-vingtshommes,Q\g}itYm(in; trois cents soldats, three hundred soldiers. Exceptions. — Cent et vingt are invariable at the end of dates. Ex. : Van mil huit cent, the year 1800. 2. Mille, only takes an s in the plural vrhen it means miles. \i\, : il y a trois milles d'ici, it is three miles from here Million and milliard are considered as nouns, and always take ail s in theplurah — Ex. : deux millions d'hovt7ncs, two millions of men ; cinq milliards de francs, five milliards of francs. Mil is used instead of mille in dates. Ex. : Van mil-huit cent-quaire-vingt-deuXf the year 1882. 3. 4. Conjugation of donner, to give Je donn-erais(*), I should give, e'ccm&rc m. Exercise No. 11. 1. The second volume — the sixth house — the ninth chapter — the twelfth tree — the fifteenth letter — the nineteenth line — the twentieth year — the thirty-second carriage — the forty-fifth book — the fifty-first birthday — the sixteenth of May — the seventy-first regiment — the eightieth battalion — the ninety-third day — the hundredth anniversary — the thousandth part— the second of January — the third of March — the first of April — Charles the second — Henry the first. He has given — we have spoken — they (f.) had walked — have you spoken? — they {m.) will not have sung — I shall have given — we should have spoken — had she walked ? — they (m. ) would have given — we shall have spoken — has he given ? — he would not have given — shall we have spoken? — you had sung — would she have found — we had not found. — we had given — have you walked ? — I had not given. 2. Ma^ deuxi^me sceur etait avec mon^ frere h, Paris. J'ai donne le premier volume k votre^ cousin. H etait dans sa^ quarante-septieme annee. J'avais trouve votre^ oncle dans la vingt-septienie avenue. Le seizieme chapitre de ce^ livre est tr^s bien ecrit^. Vous trouverez cela^ k la vingt-huitieme ligne. La cinquieme maison de cette^ rue est tres belle. Henri quatre a ete un tres grand roi de France. Je verrai^ votre^ m^re le^*' trois Avril. We had walked the first day. I shall see^^ his^^ aunt (on) the se- cond of January. I like the tenth chapter of the book ; but I do not like the(*) eleventh. I was then^^ in my^^ fortieth year. I have served^^ in the ninety-ninth regiment. It is^'' her^'' thirty-first birth- day. Have you read of ^^ the death of Charles the first. I shall come^^ (on ) the third of March. Four is the fifth part of twenty. He came-' yesterday^i for the third time^. 1 ma, my 2 mon, my 3 'ootrc, your 4 sa, his 5 ce, this 6 ecrit, written 7 cela, that 8 cette, this 9 verrai, sliall see 10 le, on the 11 shall see, vcrrai 12 his, sa 13 then, alors 14 my, via 15 served, servi 16 it is, c'cst 17 her, son IS read of, Zu 19 I shall come, je vie/tdrai 20 he came, iZ e«f i/'cim 21 yesterday, Uer 22 time, fois (J. J (*) The e of le is not elided before ovzc nnd onzicme. 62 Questions on Grammar. 1. Wliy are ordinal numeral adjectives so called? 2. Hjw are ordinal numbers formed from cardinal numbers in French I 3. Translate ^9'5^ and secoTid, twenty-first and thirty- second. 4. Translate /0M?-^A-, fifth and ninth. 5. Translate third, sixth, seventh, eighth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, thir- teenth, seventeenth, nineteenth. 6. Translate twentieth, thirtieth, sixtieth, seventieth, seventy-first, seventy -third, seventy -seventh, eightieth, eighty -second, ninetieth, ninety-second, ninety -fourth, hundredth, thousandth. 7. How are ordinal numbers used in English for dates translated into French? 8. What are the numeral adjectives which must be used in French after names of kings to indicate their order of succession? 9. Translate diaries the first; the first of March. 10. Translate Charles the fifth {Emjyeror of Gernumy), Conversation. I f ive you not seen (vu) your {voire) brother Charles in liis {sa) car- riage ? No, I have not seen my (mon) In-other Charles ; but I have seen ray brother Henry. How old are (quel age ont) your {cos) two brothers? They are twins (jumeaux) and will be (auront) sixteen (seize ans) (on) the third of March. And you ; how old are yoi\ {quel age avez-vous) ? I shall be {j'aurai) sixty- four years (on) the twenty-eighth of Apni next. The peasant's grief seems (semhle) very ])rofound. What is the matter with him {qiia-t-il)l He lost {]>''rdu) his daughter (on) the second of January. Was he not very happy formerly (anparavant) ? Ves, he was {c'etaif.) tlie happiest man in the {'In) world. Navez-V' uis pas vu votrefrere diar- ies da.ts sa voiture? Non, je n'ai pas vu mon fr^re Charles, mais j'ai vu mon frere Heuri. Quel age ont vos deux frferes? lis sont jumeaux et auront seize ans le trois Mars. Et vous; quel age avez-vous? J'aurai soixante-quatro ans, le vingt-huit Avril prochain. La douleur du paysan semble tres profonde. Qu'a-t-il ? II a perdu sa fiUo le deux Janvier. N'^tait-il pas tres houreux ravant ? aup Si, c'etait I'homme le plus heureujc du moudu. i5'6 Reading Exercise No. 11. Un paysan se croyait certainemewt'^a I'abri des caprices . himself believed certainly . . shelter . — de la fortune, lorsqu'ww jour sa vache fut^^wlevee soudam — ... his . . carried away suddenly par une maladie epidemique. Le pauvre hoinme se deso- — ... himself deso- lalt de ce malheur, qurmcPil furafflige d'un malheur blew lated . this . ... afflicted . . . much plus terrible e?icore: sa femme mourut. II se disait qu'il — still . . died . himself said . . ne se co/isolerait jamais d'uno perto semblable. II re^ut'^ „ himself would console never . . . similar . received alors la visite de tous les pn'«cipaux'~liabita?2ts du village then ... all . . . . — qui venaient lui offrir leurs condoleances : mais presqne who came him to ofifer their condolences . nearly tous, apres'^avoir epuise leurs inez7Zeurs'^argume?its, finis- all after . exhausted their . — finishe.i saienf^en lui rappelawt qu'ow ne saurait rester seul daws by him remembering . one not would know to remain . ce mowde, lorsqu'ow est^ejicore jeune et vigoureux. IuutC this . . one . still . . vigorous . one avait plusieurs filZes parnii lesquelles il pourrait choisir, several . among whom . could select I'autre avait'^'une soeur qui serait'^'heureuse de devenir la other . . . who . . to become mere de ses'^ewfa?its ; celui-la, une parewte qui dirigerait'" his that one . relative who would direct h. m.erYeille le menage de notre veuf. Jl les laissa par- marvel . household . our widower . them allowed ler ; mais il faisait remarquer plus tard a Vun de ses'^'ami.- made observe later on .... his qu'il valait mieux dans ce pays-la perdre sa femme qu'unc . was worth . , that . there to lose his wife vache: car chacM?i lui avaif'^offert de remplacer la premiere lor every one him . offered to replace . former tawdis que personne n'avait parle de la derniere." while nobody ., . . . latter 64 Twelfth Lesson. Douzieme Lepon, Demonstrative Adjectives. Demonstrative adjectives are so called because they point to 1 ]>erson or thing. Demons^trative adjectives, which always precede nouns, must not be confounded with demonstrative pronouns which like any other pronouns stand inside of nouns. In French different words are used when adjectives or pronouns, to translate this^ that, these, those. The Demonstrative adjectives are as follows : Masc. Sing. Fern. Sing. PI. ofbolTiGend. ce, cet, this or that cette, this or that ces, these or those Remark I. — Ce is used before masculine nouns beginning with consonants and cet 1)efore masculine nouns beginning with vowels or h mute; as, ce chien, this or that dog ; ce Jieros, this or that hero cet animal, this or that animal ; cet homme, this or that man II. — When it is necessary to make in French the same distinction which is made in English by using this or that, the adverbs ci or Id are placed after the nouns which are per- ceded by ce, cet, cette or ces; as, ce cheval-ci, this horse ; ce cheval-ld, that horse cet homme-ci, this man ; cet homme-ld,, that man cette femme-ci, this woman ; cette femme-ld., that woman ces maisons-ci, these houses ; ces rnaisons-ld,, those houses Ci refers to the person or thing nearer to the speaker. Id to the farther. The hyphen must always be placed between the noima and the adverbs ci and Id. Conjugation of the verb iinir, to finish. Verbs ending in ir belong to the second conjugation of regular verbs. je fin-is, I finish tu fin-is, tlcov. finishest il fin -it, he finishes nous fin-issons, we finish vous tin-issez, you finish ila fin-issent, they finish Present Indicative. finis-je, do I finish fiuis-tu, doest thou finish finit-il, docs he finish finissons-nous, do we fi',\isK fiiiissez-vous, do you finish finisseut-ils, do they fijiish 65 anger, coUref. axe, hachef. bridge, pont m. clock, horlogef. custom, habitude f. ear, oreillef. hamlet, 'hameaum.[*) hatred, 'hainef. hedge, 'haief. herb, Jierhef. history, histoiref. hospital, hdpital m. hut, liuttef. image, image f. inkstand, encrier wi, island, Uef. lobster, 'homard m. meadow, prairie f. messenger, messager m name, nom m, owl, 'hibou m. plate, assiettef. shed, ^hangar m. tower, tour f. to build, Miir to grow, gratiMr winter, hiver m. Exercise No. 12*. 1. This or that cat — this or that hamlet — ^this or that tree — this or that hospital — this or that table — this or that axe — this (yr that is- land — this or that history — these or those friends — these or those owls — these or those inkstands — these or those winters — these or those streets — these or those hedges — these or those images — these or those customs — this bridge — that shed — this bird — that hotel — this tower — that hatred — this water — that herb — these horses — those lobsters — these officers — those coats — these girls — ^those huts — these plates — those clocks. We finish — does he finish? — I do not finish — I build — he does not finish— thou finishest — they (f.) do not finish — do I finish? — does she finish? — they (m.) finish — she does not finish — we build — thou dost not finish — do we finish? — I finish — dost thou finish ? — we do not fin- iali — you build — does he grow ? — you finish — we grow — do you finish ? — you do not finish — they (m.) build — he grows — he finishes. 2. Nous finissons cette legon. lis finissent ce pont. Batissez- vous ces maisons? EUes grandissent beaucoup^. Ces chevaux-ci sont plus beaux que ces chevaux-1^. Cette ile-ci est plus grande que cette ile-la. Nous avons achete^ cette table-ci et cette chaise-Ik pour notre' »^ur. Get habit est trop grand. Cette tour-Ik est plus vieille que cette tour-ci. Mettez** les homards sur ces assiettes-la. This house is larger than that house. These boys and those girls will go'^ to the town. Give me*' these plates. Those clocks are very good. He finishes this lesson. He is in this hospital with his^ father. These hedges grow well. Put^ the bread on the table. I like these customs. These flowers are beautiful. He builds a house in this street. This lobster is good ; that lobster is bad. This hospital is large. This inkstand is small. These customs are very old. 1 ieaucoup, much 2 acheU, 'bought 8 notre, our 4 mettez, put 5 will go. iront 6 give me, donnez-moi 7 his, son 8 put, mettez (*) The apostrophe indicates that the h is aspirated. (See lesson 1). French Grammar 3 Questions on Grammar. 1. Wliy are demonstrative adjectives so called? 2. What is the difference between a demonstrative adjective and a do* raonstrative pronoun ? 3. Is there any difference in English between demonstrative adjectives and demonstrative pronouns? 4. What are the demonstrative adjectives in French? 5. When is cet used before a masculine noun instead oi cef 6. What are the adverbs which are placed after French nouns preceded by ce, cet, cette, ces, in 6rder to make a distinction between this and that or these and those f 7. What does ci refer to ? 8. What does Id, refer to ? 9. What is the sign which must always be placed between ci or lA and the noun ? Conversation. What (quels) animals did you see (avez-vous vus) in the meadow ? I saw (have seen) two horses and ten cows in this meadow. Was the peasant with his (son) horse in that meadow ? Yes ; he was& there* {y) with his horse and his (ses) cows. Have you sent (envoye) a messen- ger to the master of this mea- dow? Yes, I have sent the peasant's neighbour. What did the master say (dit) to this man ? The master was very angry and ssii(i(dit) that the peasant would be punished (puni) for putting his cows in this meadow. What did the peasant answer (r6- pondit) to this menace ? The peasant'" answer was very in- solent. But what was his answer ? He said that he would cut o^(cou- per ait) the master's ears. Quels animaux avez-vous vus dans la prairie ? J'ai vu deux chevaux et dix vaches dans cette prairie. Le paysan etait-il avec son cheval dans cette prairie? Oui; il y etait avec son cheval et ses vaches. Avez-vous envoye un messager an maitre de cette prairie ? Oui, j'ai euvoy6 le voisin du pay- san. Qu'a dit le maitre a cet liomme ? Le maitre etait dans une grande colore et a dit que le paysan serait puni pour avoir mis ses vaches dans cette prairie. Que repondit le paysan h. cette menace ? La reponse du paysan fut tres insolente. Mais quelle fut sa rc'p«nse? 11 dit qu'il couperait les oreillea du maitre. 67 Reading Exercise No. 12. Un ge?iti71iomme, qui possedait^une grande propriete, nobleman who possessed a . estate remarquait depuis longtemips que des^animaux^etrawgers remarked since long time . . . strange etaient conduits daws ses paturages et y faisaienf^ww conducted. in liis pastures . there made degat considerable. II etablifune survei7Zance et biewtot damage — . established . watch . soon ^on Vint lui dire le nom d'wn paysct?! qu'on'^avait surpris^ they came him to say .... . whom they . surprised au moment^ou il sortait^avec son cheval de la prairie. — where . came out .his . . . Le gewti'Zhomme chargea Vun de ses serviteurs d'aller cliez nobleman charged . . .his servants . to go to lui et de le prevenir que la premiere fois que son cheval his house . . him to inform . . . time . his serait trouve paissant dans le pre il lui ferait couper la grazing . . meadow, to him would make cut queue. Mais le paysan repondit^au messager: '-Je me tail . . . answered . . . niysell t»ens pour averti : mais tu diras'^a ton maitre que s'il fait hold . warned . . wilt say . . . ... makes couper la queue a mon clieval, je lui conperai les'^oreiV/es." cut off . tail . my . . him shall cut Le messager rapporta la repowse au gentt'/homme qui reported . . nobleman who ewtra dans'^une violente colere; il envoya cliercher lepay^an entered . . . .. sent to fetch et lui dit: ''Comment oses-tu me faire transmettre uue . him said How darest . to me make transmit reponse aussi j'nsolente et me menacer?" — "Moi, vous 80 . .me to threaten I you menacer, Monsieur j" repliqua le paysan." "Yous me to threaten . replied . . .me permettrezde VOUS faire observer que vous vous'^etes trowpe. will permit . . to make observe . . yourself . deceived H est vrai que j'ai dit que si Monsieur coupait la queue de . . said . if the gentleman cut oflf . tall mon cheval, je lui couperais les'^ore'/ZZes; mais j'ai voulu my . . him would cut off . , ... wished parler des^oret7?es de ce dernier • . . . latter 68 Thirteenth Lesson. Treizieme Legon Possessive Adjectives. Possessive adjectives are so called because they indicate pos- session. The following is a list of them. Sin. Masc. Fern. Plu. of all Gen. Sin. Masc. Fern. Plu. of all Gen. mon ma ton ta ton aa mes, my tes, thy ses, his, her, its notre voire leur notre voire leur nos, our vos, your leurs, their Remark 1. — Mon, ton, son are used instead of ma, ta, sa be- fore feminine nouns beginning with a vowel or an h mute. Ex. : mon dme, my soul ; ton histoire, thy history ; son image, his image. II. — In French possessive adjectives of the third person take the gender of the noun which they determine, and not as in En- glish, the gender of the possessor. Ex. : sonfrhre, her brother; sa sceur, his sister. III. — Possessive adjectives as well as any other determinative adjectives must be repeated before every noun. Indefinite Adjectives. Indefinite adjectives are so called because they determine nouns in an indefinite manner. They are as follows : certain, certain, some chaque, every, each nul, no m^ine, same tout, every, all, whole quelque, some, any aucun, not any, not one pltcsieiirs, several un tel, such a un...quelconqvx, any... whatever quel, which, what di0rents, dilleient maint, many a divers, diverse, various Remark I. — Nul, aucun and chaque are never used in the plural : therefore, the noun that follows them must be also in the singular. Ex. : Je n'ai aucun ami, I have no friends. If it were necessary to translate the noun in the plural, no woulu be translated pas de. Ex. : Je n'ai pas de maisons, I have no houses. II. — Plusieurs, differents, and divers are never used in the sin- gular ; plusieurs does not change in the feminine. III. — Un quelconque any ... whatever, becomes in the plural des ... quelconques. IV. — The plural of tout is tov^ for the masculine, and toutes for the feminine. Tout means every when no article or determinative adjective is placed before the noun. It means the whole when the noun, being preceded by an article or determinative adjective, is in the singular. Ex. : Tout homme, every man ; toicte la ville, the whole town ; ious me3 amis, all my friends. after, aprh arm, bras m. army, armeef. battle, hataillef. cannon-ball, houlet m. carpenter, charpentier city, ciUf. [m. difficulty, diJiculMf. 69 fault, fautef. floor, etage m. fork, fourchettef. bead, iStef. interesting, interes- leg, jambe/. [sant member, membre m. moutb, bottchef. nation, nation/. needle, aiguille/. rule, rlgle/. soul, dme/. subject, sujet m. queen, reine/ wood, bois m. wound, blessure/. Exercise No. 13. 1. My book — my sister — my soul — my arms — thy brother — th\ aunt — thy friend (/.) — thy feet — his pencil — her dog — its head — his pen — her house — its mouth — her needle — his eyes — her hands — its legs — our father — our army — our members — our boots — your coat — your dress — your bed — your rooms — their uncle — their aunt — their children — their faults — certain men — certain rules — certain friends — certain women — no boy — no girl — no towns — no villages — every tree — every city — the whole nation — all the words — all my sisters — such book — such letter— such knives— such forks — which dish — which plate — whieh kings — which queens — many a man — many a daughter — many soldiers — many flowers — each volume — each page — the same floor — the same house — the same gloves — the same streets — some friend — some cousin (/) — some men — some ladies — several hamlets — several cities — any book whatever — any plant whatever — any hats whatevftr — any persons whatever — different subjects — diff'erent reasons — diY»^i-»e climates — diverse rivers. (*)We finished — did I finish? — you did not finish — we built — did we finish? — he finished — I did not finish — did he build? — we did net finish — I built — I finished — did they finish? — they f'w.^ built — did you finish ? — thou didst not finish — you finished — we did not buUd— did he build? — didst thou finish? — she did not finish — thou finishedst — they (m.) finished — you built — they (/) did not finish — did he finish? 2. Nous aimons votre famille. Leur histoire est interessante. II a maint ami dans notre ville. II finissait sa le9on. J'ai ete dans dif- ferents villages. II habite^ dans la meme rue que^ moi^. Ses yeux sont bleus. Sa bouche est petite. Ses mains sont blanches. Nous n'avons pas de chambres dans notre hotel. Nos gants sont plus beaux que ceux'* de notre cousin. The houses of our village are large. The whole book is interesting. What lesson have you learnt^ ? All the dishes were very good. Show me your hat. I have some friends in this town. I find certain rules very difficult. (*) Exercise on the imperfect oifinir, to end (see Supplement, page 11). 1 hdbite, lives 2 que, as 8 moi, I 4 cetix, those 5 learnt, axtprisc 70 Questions on Grammar. Why are possessive adjectives so called ? Give the masculine singular of possessive adjectives? Give the feminine singular of possessive adjectives? Give the plural of possessive adjectives? How are my, thy, his, her, its translated before a feminine noun beginning with a vowel or h mute ? Do possessive adjectives of the third person agree in gender with the possessed object or with the possessor? What are the words which must be repeated before every noun ? Why are indefinite adjectives so called? Which are the indefinite adjectives that are never used in tV plural ? What indefinite adjective is never used in the singular? What is the plural masculine of tout? When does tout mean whole; when every / Conversation. Who Cqui) are the soldiers who (q7oiJ are on the second floor ? They are (ce sent) my cousins. What is the co'iour of theii- coats ? They are blue. Do they belong (appartiennent-ils) to the English?? armya ? No ; they are French (FraiK^ais). Who (qui) has made (fait) this table? The carpenter. Is the wood good? Yes ; it is very good. Do you find any difficulty whatever in this grammar ( grammaire) t No, I find this grammar very easy (facile); the rules are explained (expliqu4es) with clearness (clarti) and simplicity. How many (Combien de) mistakes had you in your lesson ? Twelve. Have you leamt {appris) any fo- reign language? Yes ; I have learned all European languages. Qui sont les soldats qui sont an second etage ? Ce sont mes cousins. Quelle est la couleur de leurs habits? lis sont bleus. Appartiennent-ils a I'arm^e an- glaise? Non ; ils sont Frangais. Qui a fait cette table ? Le charpentier. Le bois est-il bon? Oui ; il est tres bon. Trouvez-vous une difficulte quel- conque dans cette grammaire ? Nou ; je trouve cette grammaire tres facile ; les regies sont ex- pliquees avec clarte et simpli- cite. Combien de fautes aviez-vous danf votre devoir? Douze. Avez-vous appris quelque langue ^trangfere ? Oui ; j'ai appris toutes les langues europeennes. 71 Reading Exercise No. 13. Un capituine avait perdu une jajnbe daws'^une haiatlle captain . lost ..... C'etaif^Mn tres bon'^officier, et il etait tresliirae des soldats Ho . ... et tres'estime de son general. Cepewdant ce general le esteemed . . — However . — him cowsiderawt comine zwcapable de servir a I'avenir, lui ecrivit considering as — .to serve . . future him wrote pour le prevenir qu'il all ait lui fairs obtenir une pensioM. . him to inform . . was going him to make ohtain . — Mais le capitaine en fut tres^afflige : et un mois'^apres, captain of it was . afflicted ... lorsque sa blessure fut guerie, il se fit faire une jambe de cured . to himself made to make . bois et alia cliez le general pour lui demander de modifier . went to . — . him to ask sa decisiow : " Je peux^aussi biew marcher,** luidit-il, '*aveo — . can as well . to him said he cette jambe artificielle que je le faisais'^'avec ma jamhe artificial as . it did naturelle. D'ailleura, si je vais'^au combat, c'est pour md natural Moreover if . go to the — it . battre et non pour mesauver." Le general co?isejitit^apres fight . not . myself to save . — consented beaucoup d'hesitatiow etle capitaine rejoignit son regiment. — . . captain rejoined . — Peu de temps^apres, ce regiment fuf^engage dans"^une Little . . . . — . engaged batat7Ze et notre officier se conduisaif^avec un courage himself conducted . . — beroique, lorsqu'wn bonlet lui coupa sa jambe de bois; il heroical . . ball to him cut . . ... fut renverse et les soldats qui se trouvaient pres de lui, was thrown down . . . who themselves . near . him appelerenf^wn cbirurgien. *'Taisez-vous done," leur dit^ called . surgeon Be silent then to them said alors le capitaine, "ce n'est pas'^wn cbirurgien qu'il me then . captain it „ . . . surgeon that . to me faudrait ; envoyez-moi un cbarpentier." would be necessary send me 72 FOUBTEENTH LeSSON. Quatorzieme Leqon, The Pronoun. There are in French six classes of Pronouns, viz : Personal, Demonstrative^ Possessive^ Relative, Interrogative and Indefinite. Personal Pronouns. They are so called because they are used to designate persona. There are three persons : the 1st person who speaks, the 2nd to whom one speaks, and the 3rd of whom one speaks. Personal pronouns are conjunctive^ that is to say used in con- nection with the verb, or disjunctive used separately from the verb. Conjunctive pronouns are always placed before the verb ; dis- junctive^ which may be used without a verb, are, when used with a verb, placed after it. Personal pronouns are as follows : Conjunctive Pronouns. {'Nom. Ace. Dat. /Nom. Plui. \ Ace. (Dat. 1st Person. je, I me, me me, to me nouSy we nouSy us 710W5, ofus 2nd Person. tu, thou te, thee te, to thee Mas. il, he le, him luiy to him ilSy they les, them Zgwr.tothem 3rd Person. Few* elle, she la, her luiy to her elles, they les, them leur, to them vous, you vous, you vows, to you Disjunctive Pronouns. Ist Person. 2nd Person. Mas. 3rd Person, Fem. Sing, rrwi, I, me I ^oi, thou, thee [ lui, he, him I elle, she, her Plur. nous, we, us | vous, you | ewa;, they, them | elles, they, them There are besides four more personal pronouns of the third person, viz : se, soi, en, y. Se, himself, herself, themselves, one's self, is conjunctive and always precedes the verb. Ex.: ilseflatte, he flatters himself; ils se trompent, they deceive themselves (they make a mistake). Soi, one's self, is disjunctive and used after the verb. Ex. : ne penser qu'd soi, to think only of one's self. En generally translates of him^ of her, of it, of them and is principally used in speaking of thii'gs. Ex. : nou^ en parlons, we speak of it. Y generally translates to it, to them and can only be used in speaking of things. Ex. : il y rifhre souvent, he often refers to it. Rule. — Personal pronouns, when objects of verbs, always precede •hem in French. Sx. : il me connaU, he knows me ; nou^ les verrons, we shall see them. Exception. — Personal pronouns follow the verb in the Imperative and disjunctive pronouns are used, except for pronouns of the 3rd person. — Donnez-moi, give me; d4p6che-toi, hasten; parlez-lui, speak to her; dites-leur, say to them. 73 &heTnoon,apr^s-7]iidif. always, toujows baker, houlanger m. butcher, boucher m. cheap, bon marche difficult, difficile grocer, epicicr m. joiner, mcmiisier m. mind, esprit m. new, nouveau often, souvent park, pare m. pleasure, plaisir m. ready, prU shop, magasin m. strength, force/. terrace, terrassef. to deceive, decevoir to-morrow, demain to leap, sauter to meet, rencontrcr to supply, fournir upon, sur \croiseef. window, f entire /., Exercise No. 14. 1. I like him. — Thou knowest^ them. — He liked me. — "We shall speak to you. — You would speak to us. — They (m. ) will give the book to them. — He knows'^ me. — She spoke to me. — They (/.) knew^ us. — They spoke to us. — I like thee. — I speak to thee. — He knew^ you — He will speak to you. — I met him. — We spoke to him. — "We meet them. — You speak to them. — I like her. — I shall write^ to her. — He was with me. — He will be with us. — He spoke of thee. — Shall I dance with you? — It" is he. — We spoke with them (w.). — It^ was she. — I came^ with them (/. ). (t)"We receive — do I receive? — ^he does not receive — we deceive — I do not receive — I receive — she does not receive — you do not deceive — does he receive ? — dost thou receive ? — he receives — we do not receive — they (/.) do not deceive — you do not receive — he deceives — you re- ceive — do you receive? — I deceive — they (m.) deceive — do we receive! — thou receivest — they (m.) do not receive — thou dost not receive — do they (/.) receive? — they (w.) receive — you deceive. 2. Hs nous regoivent toujours avec un nouveau plaisir. Nous sommes prets a les recevoir. Je I'ai vu^ k la fenetre. C'^est lui qui^" me regoit. Je le rencontrerai dans le pare cette aprfes-midi. Nous les avons achetes^^ dans le magasin de votre frfere. Je les ai vus dans le jardin. Nous les avons donnes^^ k votre soeur. Je lui parlerai demain. lis regoivent leurs amis avec afFabilite. Les recevez-vous souvent? Hs degoivent notre pere. Nous le finirons demain matin. I have given them to the carpenter. The butcher sells^' them cheap. Our baker supplies them. I have given it (m.) to the grocer. The joiner has made^'* these windows for them (m.). "We meet them very often. His friend receives him always in his beautiful garden. "We like you. They will give that new book to us. "We give these apples to you. I like them. 1 knowest, connais 2 knows, connatt 3 knew, connaissaient 4 knew, connaissait 5 shall write, krirai 6 it, c' 7 came, vins 8 tm, seen 9 c', it 10 qui, who 11 achetes, bought 12 donnes, given 13 sells, vend 14 made, fait {\) See the Present Indicative of recevoir 3rd conjugation (Supplement, page 12). French Grammar. 3* 74 Questions on Grammar. 1. How many classes of pronouns are there in French t 2. "VA'liy are personal pronouns so called? 8. What are the three persons ? 4. How many kinds of personal pronouns are there; what are they! 5. What is the place of conjunctive and disjunctive personal pronouns? 6. Give the personal pronouns of the 1st person ? 7. Give those of the 2nd person? 8. Give those of the 3rd person? 9. What is the meaning of the pronouns se and soi and what are their respective places? 10. What is the meaning of en and yf 11. What is the place of personal pronouns when objects of the verb? 12. When are the}'' placed after the verb? Conversation. When ^vill the baker come [vien- dra) ? The baker will come this after- noon. Is the bread which he sells good? Yes, it is good and cheap. Is the new grocer's shop open {ouvert) ? No- the carpenters and joiners have not yet [pas encore) fin- ished their work. When do you think that every- thing will be ready ? It will be difficult to get every- thing ready (to prepare every- thing) before to-morrow. Have you been in the park this afternoon? No, the wind blew {souffiaii) very strongly. Have you heard {entendu dire) anything about. the {au sujet de la) storm? Yes ; they say {on dit) that many panes of glass have been broken Quand vicndra le boulangert Le boulanger viendra cette apr^s- midi. Le pain qu'il vend est-il bon? Qui, il est bon et bon marche. Le nouveau magasin d'ejucier est- il ouvert? Noil, les charpentiers et les menui- siers n'ont pas encore fiui leur travail. Quand pensez-vous que tout soit pret? II sera difficile de tout preparer avant demain. Avez-vous ete dans le pare cette aprfes-midi ? Non, le vent soufflait tres fort. Avez-vous entendu dire quelque chose au sujet de la tempete? Oui; on dit que beaucoup de carreaux ont ete casses. 75 Reading Exercise No. 14. On racowte I'anecdote suivawte au sujet de Thomas One relates . — following . subject . — More, Lord Chancelier d'J.)igleterre. Au commencemewt More — Chancellor . England . — de sa carriere, il habitait^une maisow sur la terrasse de career . inhabited . . • . . laquelle il se proinenait souvent : un jour qu'il se livraif^ which . . walked . . . that . . gave up a cette recreation, un fou que Von gardait daws la maison — . lunatic whom,, one kept Yoisine ecliappa a la suvyeillanQe de ses gardiens et sauta next escaped . . — . . keepers de la fenetre sur la terrasse. Apercevant le cliawoelier from . . . Perceiving . chancellor il courut vers lui et le prenawt par le bras: "Vous ran towards . . . taking ... sauterez dans la rue," lui dit-il d'une voix furieuse, ' ou je . said ... . . . . vous^y precipiterai." Le chancelier le regarda et vit que . into it shall precipitate . chancellor , regarded . saw c'etait^wn'^honime d'une force blew super ieure a la sieune this . . .... very . . his et qu'il y aurait folie a chercher^a se defendre. Mais'^il . there would be madness . try . one's self to defend ne perdit pas sa presence d' esprit. ** Je suis pret," dit-il „ lost . . — . . ... said . *'a faire ce que vous me demandez, mais permettez-moi de do that which . . ask . allow vous faire observer que cela ne presente aucune difficulte. make observe . that „ presents , — II serait beaucoup plus difficile de sauter de la rue sur difficult . . . , . . cette terrasse, et c'est ce que je vous propose de faire." . it . that which . . propose . to do Le fou reflechit^wn^/nstant d'wn'^air soupgonneux, puis^ . lunatic reflected . — . , — suspicious then eclata de rire et consentif^^ la proposition. Le chancelier burst of to laugh . consented . . — • chancelloi s'e?npres8a d'en profiter et echappa de cette maniere a oe hastened . . to proflt . escaped . • manner • • pressant dai/ger pressing — - 76 FiFTKENTH Lesson. Quinzi^me Legon. Personal Pronouns (concluded). Remarks. 1. — Personal pronouns wlien jjreceded by prepositions follow the verb. Disjunctive pronouns are used then. J e par le de vows. I speak of i/ow. II vint avec laoi. He came with me. 2. When the verb has two personal pronouns of different persons as complements, one in the accusative case (direct object) and the other in the dative (indirect object), they are both placed before the verb, in the order of priority of persons, that is to say, the pro- nouns of the 1st and 2nd persons before those of the 3rd. H me le dit. He says it to me. Je te le doniu. 1 give it to thee. 3. If the two pronouns were of the 3rd person, the direct object would be placed before the indirect object. Je le lui cnvoie. Isen6.it to him. Nous les leur donnons. We give them to them. 4. If the verb be in the imperative the direct object always precedes the indirect object. DoTiTiez-le moi. Give it to me. I^Stez-le leur. Lend it to them. 5. When the verb being in the imperative is accompanied by a negation the pronouns precede the verb and are placed respectively, as ex- plained before (R. 2 and 3). Ne me le donnez pas. Do not give it to me. Ne le leur pHtez pas. Do not lend it to them. 6. Se, which generally translates himself, herself, itself, themselves, ones self, also translates each other, one another, when placed in English after reciprocal verbs(*) in the 3rd person plural. lis Raiment tendrement. They love each other tenderly. lis s'ecriront. They will write to each otJier. 7. En which generally translates of him, of her, of it, of them, also translates the same personal pronouns, preceded by other preposi- tions when these prepositions ought to be translated in French by the preposition de. J'en suis content. I am satisfied with it. Son succds en depend. His success depends upon it. 8. En also translates some or any when placed after a verb. J" en ai. I have some. Je w'en ai pas. I have not any. 9. En is sometimes an adverb of place and translates /rom thence. J'en arrive. I arrive /7*om thence. 10. En is a preposition when preceding a noun or a present participle. En France. In France. En lisant. By reading. 11. F which generally translates to it, to them, also translates the same pronouns preceded by other prepositions, when these prepositions ought to be translated by the preposition a. J'^ pense. I think o/i^. Ilydemeure. He lives m ii. 12. F is often an adverb of place and translates tJiere. II y est. He is there. 13. En and y occur sometimes together, y, adverb always preceding en, pronoun, which is always placed immediately before tne verb. II y en a. He has some there. <*) Verbs which imply an idea of reciprocity as, se sahier, to salute one anotlier, te hair,to liate eaeli oilier, &c. among, parmv to advise, conseiller bank, lord m. betrothed , fianc6e f. to burn, hrAler to call, appeler to commence, commen- cer despair, desespoir m. dinner, diner m. 77 eve, veillef, to fall, tomber fish, poisson m. finger, doigt ?». flesh, chair f. giA, fillef. guest, convive m. incredible, incroyahle to lend,^r^ter lip, Uvref. place, endroit m. relation, parent m. research, recherche f. ring, haguef. to send, envoyer. sign, signe m. strange, strange token, gage m. Exercise No. 15. 1. "We speak of you.— I will come^ with them (m.). — You will be there without me. — He gives it to me. — He lends it to us.— I shall give it to thee. — We shall lend them to you. — I give it to him. — We shall give it to her. — I shall lend it to them (m.J. — I should lend them to them (/.). — Give them to us. — Lend them to him. — Do not give them to us. — Do not send them to him. — He burns himself. — She will burn herself. — They (m.) would burn themselves. — They (f.) burned them- selves. — They (m.) write^ to each other. — Theyf/.^hated^ one another. — He speaks of him. — We shall speak of her. — He would speak of it. — We spoke of them. — He struck'* his dog with it. — You will have some. — He had not any. — He has arrived' from thence. — They are in town. — You will leam^ it by speaking. — He alluded^ to it. — My hat hangs^ from it. — We were there. — We have some there. (*)2. Je le lui dirai^ demain. Nous vous le donnerions avec plaisir. Donnez-le lui avec son nouveau livre. Ne le leur pretez pas si vous ne voulez^" pas le perdre^^. lis se pretent de I'argent. J'en regois souvent des lettres. J'en ferai^^ ^j^ paquet pour votre frere. Ou est votre ami ? II est en France avec sa mere. II apprend^^ beaucoup en lisant^* ces livres. II y va^'* aujourd'hui avec ses cousins. Y en avez-vous? We shall send^^ him some. Give it to him and he will give it to me to-morrow afternoon. We shall lend them to you, I have some flowers ; have you any ? Where does he go^^? Do you receive any letters from them? Have you any friends there? No^^, I have not any there. Do not say^^ it to them. I have not any relations in France, but I have some here. Do they write^" often to each other ? They write to one another every month. Will you give it to them ? I will come, viendrai 2 write, ecrivent 3 hated, haismicnt 4 struck, frappa 5 has arrived, est arrive 6 will learn, apprcndrez 7 alluded, faisait allusion 8 iKings, est pendu 9 dirai, shall say 10 voidez, Avish 11 perdre, to lose 12 ferai, shall make 13 apprend, learns 14 lisaiit, reading 15 va, goes 16 shall send, enverrons 17 does he go, va-t-il IS no, non 19 say, ditea 20 do they write, ecrivent-ils (*) As the exercises of this lesson necessitate the use of several verba, we have thought preferable not to give here any special exercise on a new tense of the verb recevoir. 78 Questions on Grammar. 1. What is the place of personal pronouns when preceded by prepo- sitions ? :2. What are the respective places of the two personal pronouns, one being direct object and the other indirect object of the verb, when they are of different persons? 3. What are their places when they are both of the 3rd person? 4. What are their places when the verb is in the Imperative ? 5. How are they placed when the verb being in the Imperative is accompanied by a negation? 6. What is the meaning of se before reciprocal verbs ? 7. Does en always translate personal pronouns of the third person preceded by the preposition of? 8. What are the other meanings of enf 9. Does y aways translate personal pronouns of the 3rd person pre- ceded by the preposition to ? 10. What is the other meaning of yl 11. What are the resj)ectivc places of y and en when oemirring together before the verb? Conversation. You have a fine dog ; who gave it to you? My cousin Charles gave it to me ; but I shall return it to him. Have you also some birds ? Yes, I have some. How many have you (of them) ? I have six (of them). Have you been in the garden? they are there. No, I have not been there. You have two canaries : will you Cvoulez-vous) give me one (of them) ? With pleasure ; but you will not give it to anybody. No ; if my best frieud should ask (dematidait) me (for) it, I would not give it to him. You told (avez dit) me that you had some friends in Paris : have you still any of them there? Yes, I have still two of them there. Vous avez un beau chien; qui vous I'a donne ? Mon cousin Charles me I'a donn^ ; mais I'e le lui rendrai. Avez-vous aussi des oiseaux ? Oui, j'en ai. Combien en avez-voua? J'en ai six. Avez-vous ete dans le jardin? ils y sont. Non, je n'y ai pas ^t^. Vous avez deux canaris : voulez- vous m'en donner un ? Avec plaisir ; mais vous ne le don- nerez a personne. Non ; si mon meilleur ami me le demandait, je ne le lui donnerais pas. Vous m'avez dit que vous aviez des amis k Paris : y en avez-vous encore. Oui, j'y en ai encore deux. 79 Reading Exercise No. 15. C'etait^a la fin du diner, au momejit'^ou la conver- — when — satiow s'anime et oii les^anecdotes les plus^etra??ges, et les . enlivens . when . — . . . . . plus^iwcroyables eclosent sur les levres et souvent daws bloom .... rimaginatiow des co^ivives. Moii^o?icle, fit signe qu'il — . . . . naade voulait parler. ''II y a quelcpes'^annees," conimew9a-t-il, wished . ago . . . „ . Mw de mes""ainis'^etait^alave'/Z?e do se marier; parmi les . . eve . . to marry presents qu'il avait faits a sa fiancee se trouvaif^une which . . made .... bague d'wn certain prix, et cettejeunepersonnelaportait^ . . . value ... . wore audoigt en gage de leur engagemewt : lorsqiie, se promenant'^ — when walking un jour sur les bords de la riviere, elle se p^ncha pour . . . bent cuet7Zir un nenuphar et la bague, qui etait'^'zm pen trop to pick . water-lily . . . which .... grande, glissa de son doigt et tomba dans I'eau. La jeune slipped . . ... ... fille etaif^au desespoir: on fit, mais'^en vam, des recherches'^ in . they made . . — a Tendroif^o^ le bijou avait disparu, Ses parents et ses . . jewel . disappeared . . . . amis lui conseiV/aient de ron?pre son engagement, eifrayes to break . . frightened de ce qu'ils^appelaienf^wn mauvais presage. Ellepei>ista . which . ... — . persisted neanmo/ns. Le mariage eut lieu, Mais'^au repas de noces, nevertheless . marriage took place . . repast . wedding Mn"^enorme poisson ayawf^ete servi, quelle fut la satisfaction enormous . . . served what was . — generale lorsqu'en le decoupant, on'^y trouva " "La — . . carving they in it found bague," s'ecriereiit tous les^auditeurs h I'unissonl" **La exclaimed . . — . . unison , cbair la plus delicate et de tres petites aretes.'* ... ~ . • • • bones 80 Sixteenth Lesson. Seizieme Legon. Demonstrative Pronouns. Demonstrative pronouns are used to point to persons or tilings which have just been named before or will be named immediately after the verb. Demonstrative pronouns are as follows : Ce, ceci, celui-ci, celui this Ce, cela, celui-ld, celui that Geux-ci, ceux these Ceux-ldj ceux those Kemarks. 1. — Ce, pronoun is the same word as ce, demon- strative adjective (See Lesson 12). But, as a pronoun, ce is invariable, instead of assuming different forms in the feminine and plural. It translates indifferently this, that, these, or those. C'est ma soeur, this is my sister. Ce sont Tries freres, these are my brothers. Ge can only be used before the verb Hre, or the relative pro- nouns qui, que, dont. Ce sera la premiere fois, this will be the first time. Dites-moi ce que vous pensez, tell me (that which) what you think. Ge, translates the personal pronouns, lie, she, it, they before the auxiliary to he, when this verb is followed by a noun, (*)pronoun verb in the infinitive, or adverb. C'est bien, it is right. Ce sont mes freres, they are my brothers C'est man ami, he is my friend. C'est moi, it is I. Ge is also used to translate it and they when the verb ^tre is followed by an adjective, when this adjective refers to an idea mentioned precedingly, but not to a noun. Apprenez d, nager, c'est trhs utile, learn how to swim, it is very useful. II. — Geci, this, and cela that, are formed from the same demonstrative pronoun ce, to which the adverbs ci, here, and Id, there, have been added, in the same way as they are to nouns, preceded by demonstrative adjectives (See page 64). Ceci me jilait plus que cela, this pleases me more than that. Je vous donnerai ceci ; mais vous 'me donndrez cela, I will give you this, but you will give me that. Geci and cela can only be used in speaking of things or refer- ring to whole sentences. This and tJmt used in a general sense as complements of verbs are always translated ceci and cela. Je ferai plutdt ceci que cela, I will rather do thisihaxi that. (*) However personal pronouns are used wlien the noun which follows the verb itre is preceded by the indefinite article, which is not translated ; as. He is a doctor. 11 est irUdecin. 81 to announce, annoncer better, meilleur convenient, commode to cost, coHter dear, cJier easy, facile French, fran<^ais \f. governess, gouvernante happiness, honheur m. industrious, laborieux more, plus never, jamais night, nuitf. to occupy, occuper only, seulement to perceive, apercevoir postman, facteur m. sight, vuef. still, encore than, que to think, penser time, foisf. tongue, languef. to work, travailler Exercise No. 16. 1. This is my brother. — This is my sister. — These are my nephews. — Those are my nieces. — This will be diflBcult. — That would be very dear. — This was xevy convenient. — This is what (that which^) I think. — He is my friend. — She is my neighbour. — It is a good dog. — They are my cousins (m.). —It is well. — It is you. — This is better than that. — Do^ this. — Do that. — I like this and you like that. — He gives me that. — This pleases^ you. (*)They {/.) received — you received — did I receive? — ^he did not receive — I perceived — did you receive ? — I received — we did not receive — we perceived — they did not perceive — she perceived — did he receive ? — he received — didst thou receive ? — you did not receive — she received — I did not receive — you perceived — we received — she did not receive — did we receive? — did they (m.) receive? — they (/.) did not receive — thou receivedst — did I perceive? — thou didst not receive — They (m.) per- ceived — did they (/.) receive? — he did not perceive — they (m. ) received. 2. C'est mon p^re. C'est ma m^re. Ce sont des soldats. C'est lui. C'est une femme heureuse. Ce sont des enfauts laborieux. Ce n'est pas ce que^ vous m'avez dit**. Ceci me plait plus que cela. Ceci est facile; cela est difficile. Donnez-moi cela. Ceci coAte plus cher^ que cela. II donne ceci a mon fr^re et cela h. ma sceur. Je recevais cela chaque jour. Vous receviez ceci. C'est moi. Est-ce vous? Ce n'est pas mon ami. Etait-ce son fr^re ? Recevez cela. He is an officer in the French army. She was a governess in my cousin's family. This is a good book. This is what (that which) you gave me the other day. I received this and you received that. That costs twenty-two pounds. I have given that to the postman. I give you this and that. Do what (that which) you have promised.^ This will be the first time. She was a very good woman. It is a pretty sight. Those are my boots. I have said^ that to the soldier. What^ do you take^**: this or that? This is a very con-venient^ houses . She is a pretty girl. 1 which, qut 2 do, /aiies 3 pleases, plait 4 que, which 5 dit, said 6 plus cher, dearer 7 promised, promis 8 said, dit 9 what, que 10 do you take, prenez-vous (*) See the Imperfect of the verb recevoir, to receive (Supplement, p.p. 12, 18 & 19)i 82 Questions on Grammar. What are demonstrative pronouns? Give the four pronouns which translate this J Give the four pronouns which translate LJiaU How do you translate thesel How do you translate those f What is the difference between ce adjective and ce pronoun? Before what words can ce be used ? When does ce translate he, she, it, they? When does ce translate it and they, the verb etre being followed bj an adjective? What is the derivation of ceci ? When ca n ceci be used to translate this, after a verb ? Conversation. How do you find this ? I find this better than that. How much does this cost ? This costs three pounds. What is the price of that ? That is \YOTth.(vaut) thirty pounds. Give me this. No, I shall give you that. Is it cheap ? No, it is dearer than the other. Who (qui) received (has received) this? It is the gentleman who occupies the rooms on the first floor. Who is the most industrious, youi brother or you? (It is) my brother. Tell me {difes-moi) if the governess finds her rooms convenient. I do not know {Je ne sais pas) (that). Here is (wia) the postman. For whom are the letters / This is for my father ; those are for my cousin. Comment trouvez-vous ceci ? Je trouve ceci meilleur que oela. Combien coute ceci ? Ceci coute trois livres sterling. Quel est le prix de cela? Cela vaut trente livres sterling. Donnez-moi ceci. Non, je vous donnerai cela. Est-ce bon marche ? Non, c'est plus cher que I'autre. Qui a reju ceci ? C'est le monsieur qui occupe les chambres du prender etage. Qui est le plus laborieux : votre fr^re ou vous ? C'est mon frfere. Dites-moi si I'institutrice troiive ses chambres commodes. Je ne sais pas cela. Voici le facteur. Pour qui sont les lettres t Celle-ci est pour mon pere ; celles- Ih, sont pour mon cousin. 83 Reading Exercise No. 16. Lord Macartney avaif^occupe une positio/t honorifique — — ... — honorary- daws Farmee el il se vantait non seulemewt de n'avoir boasted . . . „ . jamais rien demawde, mais'^ewcore d'avoir refuse les faveurs anything . . ... — . — qui lui avaienf^ete offertes. II ne connaissait pas, disait- which . . . offered . „ knew . said il, de plus grand bonlieur que celui d'etre indeipendant et any . . . .... independent de faire ce qui lui plaisait. Le roi, ayawf^ete /ristruit de to do . which . pleased . . . informed cela, voulut voir si cette opinion etait sincere. Un jour wished to see . . — . — . . done il le prif^a part et lui demareda mysteriensement s'il then . . took aside . . . mysteriously . . savait I'espagtiol. "No/i, Sire," repojzdit Macartney, mais knew . Spanish . . answered — je I'apprendrai immediatement, si cela fait plaisir a votre . . shall learn immediately . . does majeste." "Oui, vraime/^t," repliqua le roi, "je vous le replied . . ... conse«7Ze, et vous^aurez^a vous^en feliciter." Macartney advise . . . . yourself for it to congratulate — cowclut de cette sample conversation que le roi avait Vin- •oncluded . . simple — ... . . tention de lui confier quelque mportante mission diplo- — . . entrust . imjiortant — — matique. II se mit a^trava«7?er jour et nuit,ettrois mois . himself put . . apres'^il annon^ait^au roi-qu'il savait parfaitement la langue perfectly espagnole. " Tant mieux," repondit le roi, " cela vous So much thehetter . . . . . permettra de lire Don Quichotte dans I'origiiial." will allow . - — Quixoto , . — 84: Seventeenth Lesson. Dix-septieme Legon. The Demonstrative Pronoun (concluded). III. — Gelui-ci, this, is derived from ce, this, lui, lie and^ a, here. It is used in speaking of persons or things every time it is necessary to indicate that the person or thing pointed to is of the masculine gender and singular number, and is nearer to the speaker than another person or thing; celui-la (that-he- there) being used. to point to the farther. Vous voyez ces deux chevaux : celui-ci est plus cher que celui- Id. You see these two horses : this one is dearer than that. Celui-ci and celui-ld are often translated the latter and the former. Mon pere et mon frere sont partis ; celui-ld va k Paris et celui- ci va k Rome. My father and brother have departed ; the former goes to Paris and the latter goes to Rome. Ceux-c% these, and ceux-ld, those, derived from ce-eux-ci or Id refer to a masculine plural noun. Avez-vous vu les oiSiciers et les soldats ; ceux-ld out de plus beaux uniformes que ceux-ci? Have you seen the officers and soldiers ; those have finer uniforms than these, Celles-ci, these, or celles-ld, those, ce, elks, ci or Id point to a feminine plural noun. De ces fleurs, celles-ci sont plus belles que celles-ld. Of these ttrwers tliese are more beautiful than those. lY.—Gelui, celle, ceux, celles, derived respectively from ce- iui, ce-elkj ce-eux, ce-elles are used in the same manner as celui- •I, C6W(!-a, (i'C. , but before relative pronouns and prepositions only, the •d verbs ci and Id being no longer necessary to point more accurately. J'aime cette maison, mais je prefere celle de mon p^re. I like this house, but 1 prefer that of my father (my father's). Ces livres sont iat^ressants ; mais Je prefere ceux que vous m'avez donnes hier. These books are interesting, but I prefer those which you gave me yesterday. Celuiy celle, ceuXj celles translate indifferently this or tJiat, and these or those. They often translate the one or the ones and the personal pronouna he, she, him, it, they, them before relative pronouns. Ce n'est pas celui que je pensais. It is not tJie one I thouglit. Je connais celui qui a dit cela, I know him wlio said tliat. 85 author, auteur m. bill, note/. to buy aclhcter cake, gateau m. clear, clair coin, pi^ef. cold, froid to compose, composer to deceive, dccevoir to flatter, flatter grammar, grammairef. grandfather, grand-p^re to inhabit, haUter \m. learned, itistruit object, ohjet m. piece, piece f. polite, poU rare, rare soup, soupef. spacious, spacieux stream, ruisseau m. to study, ctudier tailor, tailleur m. warm, chaud yesterday, hier Exercise No. 17- 1. I like this horse; but I do not like that.— This one is good: that one is bad. — Give me this book and I shall give you that. — I un- derstand^ this rule, but I do not understand that. — These houses are more spacious than those. — My pen is worse than this. — Your gar- den is prettier than that. — These birds are rarer than those. — This book is not my father's (that of my father). — These gloves are my grandfather's (those of my grandfather). — This wine is that which'' I bought (have bought) this morning. I like him who is a good son. (*)We shall receive — I shall not receive — shall I receive? — they (/. ) will not receive — will he receive ? — I shall receive — will you not receive? — he will not receive — they (m.) will receive — we shall not re- ceive — he will receive — they (m. ) will not receive — wilt thou receive? — she will not receive — shall we receive?— you will receive — I will deceive — will you receive ? — shall we not deceive ? — shall I not receive ? — she will receive — thou wilt receive — you will not receive — they (f.) will receive — thou wilt not receive. 2. De ces deux jeunes filles, celle-ci est plus instruite que celle-lk. Ces grammaires-ci sont meilleures que celles-lJi. Ces messieurs- ci sent plus polls que ceux-lk. Ce ruisseau-ci est plus clair que celui-lk Cetto eau-ci est plus froide que celle-1^. Cette soupe-ci est plus chaude que celle-lk Ce vin-ci est bon, mais celui de mon pke est meilleur. J'ai vu^ le chien de votre frere, mais je n'ai pas vu celui de son ami. J'aime cette couleur-ci mais je n'aime pas celle de la robe de votre cousine. He who studies every day will soon become'* learned. These boots are not the ones I bought the other day. That glass is larger than your friend's (that of your friend). Give me these coins and I will give you those. I have received^ my tailor's bill, I shall receive my shoemaker's* this morning'*. We have received your cousin's visit, we shall receive that of his friend this afternoon. We like this house, we do not like that. These chairs are better than those. This gentle- man writes^ quicker than that one. This ink is clearer than that. 1 understand, com'prends 2 which, que 3 vu, seen 4 will become, deviendra 5 received, reftt 6 writes, 6crit (») See Future of recevoir, and the conjugation of verbs interrogatively and nega- tively (Supplement, p.p. 12, 18 & 19). 86 Questions on Grammar. 1. From what words is celui-ci derived? 2. When is celui-ci used to translate this? 3. Give the etymology of celui-ldf 4. What is the feminine of celui-ci and celui-ld, f 6. What is the plural masculine of celui-ci; from what is it derived! 6. Give the plural feminine of celui-ld and its etymology? 7. When are celui, celle, ceux, celles, used instead of cehci-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci? 8. How are the one who (or he who) translated? 9. How do you translate he who f Conversation. Which stuff will you take {pren- drez-vous) this one or that ? I shall take (je prendrai) this one; but I think that one is better, only it is too dear for me. Take {prenez) that one : it will last {durera) longer {plus long- teyyips). Is it not the one which {que) you have sold {vendue) to my friend Mrs. ... {Madame) I No it is that which [que) I showed {ai montr^e) you in the other room. What {qicel) is the price of that? That costs two francs and fifty centimes a (le) metre [mttre). Are these gloves those which {que) my sister saw (has seen) {vus) yesterday ? No, Miss {Mademoiselle), they are not the same. Is this parcel mine {le mien) ? No, it is Mrs.'s...(thatof Mrs....). Will you send {enverrez) that to my hotel ? Yes, Madam, with the greatest pleasure. Quelle etoffe prendrez-vous ; celle- ci ou celle-la ? Je prendrai celle-ci, mais je pense que celle-la est meilleure; seule- ment elle est trop chere pour moi. Prenez celle-lk ; longtemps. elle durera plus N'est-ce pas celle que tous avez vendue k mon amie, Madame...? Non c'est celle que je vous ai montree dans I'autre chambre. Quel est le prix de celle-la? Celle-lk co^te deux francs cin- quante centimes le mfetre? Ces gants sont-ils ceux que ma soeur a vus hier ? Non, Mademoiselle; ce ne sent pas les memes. Ce paquet-ci est-il le mien? Non, c'est celui de Madame ... Euverrez-vous celui-lk a mon hotel? Oui, Madame, avec le plus grand plaisir. 87 Reading Exercise No. 17. Tin poete avait^wn jour compose une piece de vers poet ... . . . verses sur les gateaux que faisaif^Mw jiatissier renomme de la ville which mado . pastry-cook renowned . . qu'il habitait. Le patissier, quoiqu'il ne cultivat pas which . inhabited . . though . „ cultivated beauooup les Muses, fut cej^e^idawt flatte daws son orgue^7, ~ . however ... a la reception d'ww'^exemplaire de cette poesie: il vouluf^ — . . copy . . poetry . wished en temoigner sa satisfactiow h, I'auteur et crut qu'il ne for it to show . — .... believed . . no pf Qvait mieux faire que de lui e?zvoyer un des objets qui could better do than . , to send . . , which avaient'^eve27Ze son'^'twspiratiow. Le poete re^ut d'abord awaken . — . . received at first cef^eiivoi avec plaisir et se mif^a deguster le chef-d'oeuvre . message . . .himself put . taste . master-piece Hppetissawt; mais quelle ne fut pas son^humiliation en relishing . what „ . . . . on decouvrawt que le patissier s'etait servi de la piece de vers discovering . . . had made use . . — ; . elle-mome pour le faire cuire au four. II lui ecrivit done itself for . to make cook in the . . . wrote then une lettre iwdignee, ou il I'accusait du crime de lese-poesie indignant where . , . . — . oflFenceagainst poetry "De quoi vous plaignez-vous?" lui repondit le patissier; what yourself complain . . answered ** Je n'ai fait qu'imiter vos precedes. Vous aviez fait^une „ . done but to imitate . proceedings . . made poesie sur mes gateaux et, moi, j'ai faif^wn gateau sur voire poesie.*' 88 Eighteenth Lesson. Dix-Jiuitieme Legon. Possessive Pronouns. Possessive Pronouns are those which express possession. They are as follows : Singular. Masc. le mien le tien le sien le notre le voire le leur Fern. ia mienne la tienne la sienne la nStre la voire la leur Plural. Masc. les miens Us tiens les siens les nSires les vSires les leurs Fern. les miennes les tiennes les siennes les nOires les votres mine thine his, hers, its ours yours - theirs Remarks. I.— It must he noticed that the o of nStre and vStre, when pronouns, has the circumflex accent, which does not exist in notre and votrey possessive adjectives. II. — The words nOtrCj voire and leur do not change in the feminine. III. — The rule given in Lesson 13 for possessive adjectives of the the third person must also be applied to possessive pronouns ; thus, ce livre et le sien, translates as well this hook and his, as this hook and hers. To avoid the lack of precision which may result from it, when it is necessary to indicate to whom an object belongs, possession is expressed by the verb eire, to be, followed by the preposition d and the disjunctive j)ersonal pronouns. Eire is in such cases the translation of the English verb to belong. Ce livre est d ltd, this book is his or belongs to him. Ce livre est d elle, this book is Iters or belongs to her. Cette maison est d moi, this house is mine or belongs to me. Ces chevaux sont d noios, these horses are ours or belong to ws. IV. — Le mien, le tien, le sien, n.) will speak, — we should commence, —they (ifa.) will build, — you would receive, — I sell. .» French Grammar. 106 Questions on Grammar. 1. Whicli are the three tenses which always end in the same manner whatever may he the conjugation, whether regular or irregular? 2. What is gsnerally the last letter of the 1st person singular? 3. What is always the last letter of the 2nd person singular? 4. What is the last letter of the 3rd person, when not a vowel? 5. What are the two endings which may be found in the 1st person plural ? 6. What are the two endings of the 2nd person plural ? 7. How does the 3rd person plural always end ? 8. Which are the two tenses in which the 1st and 2nd plural are always the same (with very few exceptions) ? 9. What are the endings of the Past Definite ? 10. What are the endings of the Present of the Subjunctive? 11. What are the endings of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive? 12. In what tenses and persons is the circumflex accent to be always found on the vowel of the ending ? 13. Which is the conjugation which includes the greatest number of verbs in French? 14. What are the only regular verbs of the 3rd conjugation? 15. How many persons are there in the Imperative ? Conversation. What is the most important part of speech in all languages ? (It is) the verb. Can French verbs terminate in the Infinitive in any manner what- ever? No ; they can only end in four ways, viz : er, ir, oir, re. What is indicated by the ending of the infinitive of a verb ? The conjugation to which it belongs What is to be done after ascer- taining to what conjugation a verb belongs ? It must be ascertained whether -'t be regular or irregular. Bow can you ascertain that? By looking al the tables of ir- regular verbs, Part 14. Verbs which are not given, nor composed with any of those which are given therein, are regular. Quelle est la partie du discours la plus importante dans toutes les langues ? C'est le verbe. Lw verbes fran5ais peuvent-ils se terminer k I'infinitif d'une ma- niere quelconque ? Non ; ils ne peuvent se terminer que de quatre mani^res, c'est k dire en er, ir, oir or re. Qu'indique la termination de Tin- finitif d'un verbe ? A quelle conjugaison il appartient. Que faut-il faire apr^s s'etre assur^ de la conjugaison h, laquelle appartient un verbe ? II faut s'assurer s'il est regulier ou irregulier. Comment pouvez-vous trouver cela? En regardant les tableaux des verbes irr^guliers, dans la 14eme livraison. Les verbes qui n'y sont pas donnas ou qui ne sont composes avec aucun de ceux qui y sont donnes, sont reguliers. 107 Reading Exercise No. 22. Tin predicateur celebre, ayant un jour faitl un ma- gnifique sermon dans lequel il avait fletri de la maniere la plus eloquente le vice detestable de I'usure, se preparait2 h quitter I'eglise, lorsqu'il fut accoste par un usurier, qu'il connaissait^ parfaitement de* reputation. Le pretre, voyant* qu'il cherchaits a lui parler, se felicitait interieure- ment''' de I'effet de ses paroles, et s'attendait h ce* qu'il allait^ lui aninoncer sa conversion. II conimen9ait meme a le feliciter de sa demarclie^o et de ses meilleures intentions pour I'avenir, lorsque^l I'li surier I'arreta court. *' Je crains^^^'* lui dit-ili3, <«qiie vous ne fassiezl* erreur: j'ai trouve en verite^S que vous aviez admirablement parle, et je recon- naisis toute la force de vos arguments; je vous prie d'agreerl7 mes sinceres felicitations, j'ajouterai meme, mes remerciments : car je ne doute pas que tous ceux de mes confreresis qui se trouvaient a I'eglise n'aient ete^^ pro- fondement20 emus2l par votre sermon, et effrayes des cbati- inents22 dont vous nous menacez, et qu'ils n'abandonnent23 aussitot une si infume24 profession. De cette fa9on26 je res- terai seul a faire rusure26; je ferai27 des profits conside- rables, je deviendrai28 excessivement29 riche et c'est a vous, ou plutotso a votre sermon, que je devrai tout ce bonbeur- la." Le pauvre predicateur etait bien^l desappointe et il se demanda si peut-etre chacun des usuriers n'avait pas fait32 le meme raisonnement. 1/atY, made, 2 se^^^aratY, was preparing himself, S eonnaissait^ knew, 4 de, by, 5 voyant, seeing, 6 cherchait, was endeavouring, 7 intirieurement, internally, 8 s'attendait d ce, expected, 9 allait, was going, 10 de sa d-marche, for his step, 11 lorsqite, when, 12 je crains, 1 fear, 13 dit-il, said he, 14/assiez, make, 15 en veritd, indeed, 16 reconnaifi, acknowledge, 17 d'agrier, to accept, 18 confreres, col- leagues, 19 n'aient ete, have been, 20 profondement, deeply, 21 emus, moved, 22 des chdtiments, by the chastisements, 23 qu'ils n'aban- donnent, that they will abandon, 24 une si imfdme, such an in- famous. 25 de cette fa(^on, in this manner, 2Q faire Vu^fure, to be an usurer, 21 ferai, shall make, 28 devicnrf/rai, shall become, 29 ex- cessirement, exceedingly, 30 plutdt, rather, 31 bien, very much, 02 fait, made. 108 Twenty-third Lesson. Vingt-troisieme Legon. Adverbs. The adverb is a word used to modify the sense of a verb, and also of an adjective, participle or another adverb. In French they follow the verb in simple tenses, and in compound tenses are placed between the auxiliary and the participle. II parle souvent. He often speaks. J'ai bien dormi. I have slept well. Adverbs may be divided into ten classes, viz. : adverbs of manner^ time, place, order, quantity, comparison, affirmation, nega- tion, douht and interrogation. Adverbs of Manner. Adverbs of manner express how things are done. They are formed from qualifying adjectives by the addition of ment. Three cases arise in this formation. Rule. 1. — If the adjective end with a vowel, ment is added to the masculine. — Joli, pretty, j aliment, prettily; aisS, easy, aisement, easily ; honnUe, honest, honnetement, honestly. Exceptions. — Follement, ioo\\%h\Y \ mollement, softly ; nouvelle- ment, newly ; bellement, gently ; gaiemint, gaily, are formed from the feminine adjectives, folle, molle, nouvelle, belle, gaie. 2. — If the adjective end with a consonant, ment is added to the feminine. — Heurcux, happy, hcureusement, happily ; long, long, longue- ment, long or longly ; doux, sweet, doucement, sweetly. 3. — Adjectives ending in ant and ent form their adverbs by changing nt into mment : Prudent, -prndent, prudemnunt, prudently; constant, constant, con- stamment, constantly ; innocent, innocent, innocemment, innocently. Exceptions. — Lent, slowynnd. 2}resent, present, v^A^wign^, vehement, form their adverbs regularly, lentcment, slowly ; jjresentement, presently, viMmentement, vehemently. The adverb formed from gentil, nice, is gentiment. Remarks. 1. — The following adverbs take an acute accent on the e which precedes ment, when no such accent exists in the adjectives themselves. — Aveuglement, blindly (from aveugle) ; commodement, conveniently (from commode) ; commuiiiment, commonly (from commun) ; conformdment, conformingly (from conforme) ; inormAmeyd, enormously (from inorme) ; express6ment, expressly (from expris) ; importuniment, importunely (from importun) ; obsciiremcnt, obscurely (from obscur) ; opinidtrement, obstinately (from opinidtre) ; pricisiment, precisely (from prdcis) ; pro- fondement, profoundly (from profovd) ; profus6mcnt, profusely (from prof us) ; impuniment, with impunity (from impuni) . 2. — Bien, well, onal, badly, pis, worse, mieux, better, must also be considered as adverbs of manner. 109 address, adresstf. advice, cmiseil m. attentive, attentif cheapness, hon marche m. to counsel, conseiller deseit, disert m. despatch, depechef. to forward, exp6dier full, plcin to hang, suspendre to hide, cacher immediate, immediat legible, lisible march, marche f. name, iiotti m. other, autre to pass, passer pole, foteau m. to recommence, recom* TTiencer to refresh, rafratchir road, route f. sand, sable m. suffering, snuffrance f. ti^\Qgv^\i\i,telegraphe m. wire, fil {defer) m. way, moycn m. Exercise No. 23. Form the Adverbs from the following Adjectives. 1. Facile— petit — diligent — savant — fou - triste — liaut — vrai— profond — commun— lent — enorme — hardi — unique — delicat — franc — large— precis — imperieux — apparent — gentil — beau — raisoniiable — d^mesure — elegant — importun — chaud — innocent — aveugle — present — mou — exprfes — loyal — timide — remarquable — malheureux — gai — galant — delicieux — nouveau — frequent — proportionn^ — imprudent — opinidtre — religieux — necessaire— egal — comique— intelligent — ingenu — propre — decent — clair — mortel — vehement — impuni. (*) "Would he sell ? — I should hear — should we wait ? — he would sell— they would not wait — they (m.) would hear — should I sell ? — they (m. )would sell — would he not sell ? — we should sell — should I not sell ? — should we sell ? — thou wouldst sell — you would hear — would they (/.) sell? — you would wait — would they (m.) sell ? — he would hear— I should sell — would you not sell ? — we should hear — would I wait ?— would you sell ?— wouldst thou sell ?— you would sell — would she sell ? — should we not sell ? 2. Vous travaillez laborieusement. 11 travaille bien et ses parents sont contents de^ sa conduite. II parle tres eloquemment et tout le monde I'ecoute^ attentivement. II parlait tres froidement. II appren(P aisement cette langue. Le temps passe rapidement. Je le voit,^ rarement. lis sont^ arrives en ville et j'attends impatiemment le^ resultat de leur visite. Nous I'aimons sinc^rement. II parle parfaite- ment la langue frangaise. On trouve principalement cette fleur dans les pays froids. The postman rarely comes^ at eight o'clock. I wait (for) his answer impatiently. I am greatly astonished, That page is badly written,^ you will recommence it immediately. I shall pass rapidly to the principal rules ; I think that you Avill easily understand^ tliem. That would certainly happen. He imitates his friend very well. 1 de, with 2 Vicoute, listens to him 3 apprend, learns 4 vols, see 5 sont, hav« Q te, for the 7 comes, viefit 8 written, ecrite 9 will uiiderstaud, comprendrez. * See tlie coiiditioua,! of rendr^. no Questions on Grammar. 1. What is an adverb ? 2. What is the place of adverbs in French ? 3.- How many classes of adverbs are there ? what are they? 4. How do adverbs of manner end in French ? 5. How are adverbs derived from adjectives ending with a vowel ? 6. How are adverbs derived from adjectives ending with a consonant? 7. How are adverbs of manner derived from adjectives ending in ant or ent ? 8. Give some adjectives ending with vowels which do not follow this rule? 9. Give some adverbs which take an acute accent on the e before mentt 10. Give some adverbs of manner which do not end in inentt Conversation. Who {q^ii est-ce qui) spoke so ele- gantly ? It (is) was the deputy who has been elected {4lu) lately. He speaks very slowly and dis- tinctly. Do you hear him fre- quently ? No, I go to the house [of parlia- ment] (chamhre) very rarely. Did you arrive {Hes vous arrivi) safely at the end of your journey ? Yes, thank you (merci) ; un- happily I found my sister dan- gerously ill, and I had only (the) time to run immediately to the doctor's. Does he come {vient) exactly at the time you expect him ? Usually he conies very punctually. Do you pay him regularly every week ? Yes, I generally pay hira every Saturday evening. Do you think really that he is in want of money ? I think so. Qui est-ce qui a" parle si elegam- mcnt ? C'est le depute qui a ete elu der- ni^rement. II parle trea lentement et tr^s distinctement. L'entendez-vous fvequemment ? Non, je vais tres rarement k la chambre. Etes-vous arriv6 sain et sauf au terme de votre voynge ? Qui, merci ; malheureusement j'ai trouve ma sceur dangereuse- ment malade, et je n'ai eu quele temps de courir immediatement chez le docteur. Vient-il exactement k I'heure k laquelle vous I'attendez ? Ordinaircment il vient tr^s ponc- tuellement. Le payez vous r^guli^rement chaque semaine ? Qui, je le paie g^neralement chaque samedi soir. Croyez-vous reellement qu'il ait besoin d'argent ? Je le crois, Ill Reading Exercise No. 23, On raconte qu'un paysan, dont le fils servait^ dans un regiment en garnison^ en Algerie,^ regut* un jour de lui une lettre dans laqiielle il lui disait,^ entre^ autres choses, que ses souliers avaient et6 briiles par le sable pendant les longues marches qu'il avait faites'' dans le desert ; il fmissait sa lettre en priant^ son p^re de lui en envoyer une autre paire le plus tot possible.® Nicolas/^ c'etait le nom du paysan, plein de com- passion pour les fatigues et les souffrances de son fils, commanda^^ immediatement une paire de souliers au cordonnier de son village. Mais quand ils furent fails, ^^ n -j^e savait^^ de^* quelle manicre les lui envoyer, et il demandait conseil k tons ses amis. L'un d'eux, voulant^^ se moquer de^'' sa simplicite, lui conseilla de les lui expedier par le telograplie, lui disant^*" qu'il n'aurait qu'^^a les pendre au fil de fer qu'il voyait^^ soutenu^^^ par des poteaux tout le long de^^ la route, et que la premiere depeche, qui passerait k destination de I'Algerie, les transporterait^^ jusqu'^*^ Constantine, ou se trouvait-* alors son fils. La simplicite et le bon marche de ce moyen seduisirent^^ le paysan. II mit^^ une adresse bien lisible, qu'avait dcrite^"^ le maitre d'ecole,^^ sur les souliers ; y caclia deux pieces de cinq francs, pour que^'^ son fils ptit^^ se rafraicliir k sa sant6 et, ^tant sortr'^^ du village, sus- pendit^2 Iqq souliers au fil telegraphique, puis^^ retourna k son travail. (To be continued.) 1 servait, served, 2 garnison, gan-ison, 3 Alglrie, Algeria, 4 re^ut, received, 5 disait, said, 6 entre, among, 7 faites, made, 8 priant, begging, 9 le 2JJus t6t possible, as soon as possible, 10 Nicolas, Nicholas, 11 commanda, ordered, 12 furent fails, were made, 13 savait, knew, 14 de, in, 15 voulant, wishing, 16 se moquer de, laugh at, 17 disant, saying, 18 ne...que, only, 19 voyait, saw, 20 soutenu, supported, 23 tout le long de, all along, 22 transporterait, would transport them, 23 jusqua, as far as, 24 se trouvait, 'was, 25 seduisirent, seduced, 26 mit, put, 27 icriie, written, 28 maitre d'^cole, school-master, 29 pour que, in order that, 30 pM, could, 31 4tant sorli, having gone out, 32 susjiendii, hung, 33 puis, then. 112 Twenty-fourth Lesson. Vingt-quatrihne Legon. Adverbs of Time. These adverbs are : for the present : — aujourd'hui, to-day; maintenant, now; dprcsenf, now; for the future: — demam, to-morrow ; apHs-demain, the day after to- morrow; bientdt, soon ; avant peu^ shortly ; disormais, henceforth ; • for the past : — hier, yesterday ; avant-hicr, the day before yesterday ; autrefois, formerly ; jadis, formerly ; deptiis jjeu, lately. Oilier adverbs of time do not refer to any special time ; as, de bonne hcure, early ; tOt, soon ; tard, late ; d^jd, already ; encore, still, yet ; souvent, often ; longtemps, for a long time ; toujours, always ; jamais, never ; tantdt, sometimes ; quelquefois, sometimes, &c. Adverbs of Place. The principal adverbs of place are : oil, where ; d'oii, from whence ; id, here ; let, y, there ; devant, before ; dcrribre, behind ; dessus, upon ; dessous, underneath ; en haul, above, upstairs; enhas, below, downstairs; dedans, au dedans, inside, within; dehors, au dehors, outside, without ; loin, far ; pr^s, near ; partout, everywhere ; auprhs, near ; ensemble, together ; au dessus, over ; au dessous, beneath, &c. Adverbs of Order. They are generally formed from ordinal adjectives by adding ment to the feminine : premih^ement, firstly; 5cco?ic^meM^, secondly ; cmgwi^mewgJ'J, fifthly, &c. There are also : — d'abord, at first ; auparavant, before ; puis, ensuite, then ; enjin, at last ; alors, then ; apres, after, &c. Adverbs of Quantity. The principal are : — beaucoup, much, many ; ^jei^, little ; un peu, a little, rather ; assez, enough ; trop, too, too-much ; bien, fort, trhSy very ; tout A fait, quite ; au mains, at least ; au plus, at the most ; en outre, besides ; cher, dear ; bon marche, cheap ; environ, about ; teulement, only ; ne.. que, but, only, &c. Adverbs of Comparison. The principal are -.—plus, more ; moiv^, less ; au^si, as ; comme, as ; si, so ; autant, as much ; tant, so much ; de mSme, likewise ; davantage, more ; le plus, the most ; le moins, the least ; presque, almost ; d peu prhs, nearly ; que, than, as, &c. Adverbs of Affirmation, Negation and Doubt. Adverbs of alfirmation are : — oui, yes ; si, yes (in answer to a negative question) ; certes, certainly ; vraiment, indeed ; volontiers, willingly ; assurement, assuredly ; sans doute, without doubt ; d'accord, granted, &c. Adverbs of negation are : — non, no ; ne...pas, not ; point, pas du tout, not at all ; nullement, by no means; cependant, toutefois, however. Adverbs of doubt are -.—peut-^trt'., perhai)S ; jirobablemetit, likely. Adverbs of Interrogation. The principal are : — comment, how ; combien, how much ; comhien de temps, how long ; quand, when ; pourquoi, why ; ou, where, &c. 113 mendiant m. to communicate, com- muniqucr \buer to contribute, contri- creditor, creancier m. daily , journalier debtor, debiteur m, to desire, desirer expense, dip&iisef. to go out, sortir to grant, accorder hardly, a peine idea, idee f. to lead, conduire to lock up, enfermer maintenance, entretien m. \leux marvellous, merveil- to pay, payer plant, pi ante f. prison, prison/. to resist, resister sad, triste to send back, renvoyer sorrow, chagrin m. tedious, ennuyeux term, terme m. Exercise No. 24. 1. My brother (has^) arrived the day before yesterday. — Formerly he was an officer. — I have seen^ him very little lately. — It is still early, I thought that it was later. — I have been in France for a long time. — I was here and he was there. — Put^ this (m,) before, and I shall put^ that behind. — We were upstairs and they were downstairs. — It is very far. — You will find it everywhere. — He is outside. — They are together. — I did not like him at first. — You will speak before ; I shall speak then. — He arrived*^ at last. — I like him (very) much. — It is rather dear. — You ask too much for it (of it). — This costs more. — It is nearly two o'clock. — Do you like it? Yes. — Do you not see^ it? Yes. — I shall speak to him willingly. — I do not like him at all. — He will be here, perhaps, in two months. — How do you say' that? {*)We loved — I punished — you received — we rendered — did I receive ? — I loved — I did not love — he punished — did we not render? — they (/.) received — they (m.) rendered — he loved — thou renderedst — wepuiiished — ^thou receivedst — I received — did you not love ? — you loved — did you love ? — I did not receive — you rendered — did I render ? — They (m. ) loved — he received — they (m.) punished — thou punishedst — we received — I rendered — we did not receive — thou lovedst — you punished. 2. Avez-vous dejk fini le livre que vous avez commence avant-hier? Non ; je le finirai demain. Etait-il dessus ou dessous ? II etait dehors. Comment appelez-vous cette fleur ? Aimez-vous cette plante ? Non, je ne I'aime pas. Ce chapeau n'est-il pas k votre gout? — Si, je I'aime beaucoup. Pourquoi venez^-vous si tard. II m'a ete impossible de venir plus t6t. Trouvez-vous qu'ils vendent cela trop cher ? — Un peu. Oil irez^-vous d'abord ? Formerly he was very rich ; now he is very poor. Sometimes he spoke to me. It is your cousin Charles who speaks best. He works more. My father will be here to-morrow, and we shall be there the day after to-morrow. I do not like him so much as his brother. He is very rich, and he is also very generous. I meet him sometimes in the park. 1 has, est 2 1 have seen, fai vu 3 put, mettez 4 shall put, mettrai 5 arrived, arriva 6 do see, voyez 7 do say, dites 8 venez, come 9 ircz, will go (*) See the past deliuite of the four Conjugations (Supplement, p.p. 10 to 13). 114 Questions on Grammar. 1. Give the principal adverbs of time? 2. What are the principal adverbs of place? 3. How are adverbs of order generally formed ? 4. Translate much, as much, so much, how much. 6. Give the adverbs of comparison mostly used. 6. What is the difference between si and ouit 7. Give some adverbs of negation ? 8. Translate how, enough, too, about. When will you be here ? I shall be here to-morrow early. When will you start ? (In) the evening as late as I can (pourrai). How far will you go {irez) ? I shall go {irai) as far as the rail- way goes {va). How long will you be absent! About two or three weeks, only. How will you come back {revien- drez) ? I do not know (sais) yet ; but I think I shall come back by the steamboat. When will you write {dcrirez) to me? I shall write to you as soon as (que) 1 know (saurai) exactly the day of my return to London. Do you want me to do {avez-vous hesoin que je fosse) anything for you here? I thank you (very) much indeed ; I think I will accept your kind offer. I shall do very willingly every- thing I can (ce que je pourrai). Good bye. Conversation. Quand serez-vous icif Je serai ici demain de bonne heure. Quand partirez-vous ? Le soir, aussi tard que je pourrai. Jusqu'oii irez-vous ? J 'irai aussi loin que le chemin de fer va. Combien de temps serez-vous ab- sent ? Environ deux ou trois semaines, seulement. Comment reviendrez-vous? Je ne sais pas encore; mais je pense que je reviendrai par le bateau k vapeur. Quand m'^crirez-vous? que je Je vous ecrirai aussit6t saurai exactement le jour mon retour h. Loudrcs. Avez-vous besoin que je fasse ici quelque chose pour vous ? Je vous remercie beaucoup, vrai- ment ; je pense que j'acceptemi votre offre obligeante. Je ferai troe volontiers tout ce que je pourrai. ' Adieu 1 115 Reading Exercise No. 24. ( continued from No. 23.^ Mais il etait a peine partial qu'2 im mendiant qui avait vu3 de loiii^ ce qui se passait,^ accourut,^ s'empara^ des souliers neufs et les remplaga par^ les siens qui etaient dans la plus piteuse^ condition. line heure apres, Nicolas, ne pouvantio resister au desir de savoirll si la depeche etait deja passeel2^ revintl^^ et voyantl'* les vieux souliers a la placets des neufs: "Quelle merveilleuse rapidite," s'ecria-t-ili6; et, decrocliantl^ les vieux souliers, il alia les montrer a ses amis, disant^^ que c'etaient ceux que son fils lui avait renvoyes^^ par la meme voie20. Un debiteur ayant ete enferme en prison pour dettes fit21 un jour appeler son creancier. "Monsieur," lui dit- il22, " sans vouloir23 parler de la vie triste et ennuyeuse que je mene ici, je ne puis2* penser sans un profond chagrin a25 la depense joumaliere que vous faites26 ici inutilement a cause de moi27, et j'ai voulu28 vous communiquer une idee qui m'etait venue29. Yous avez a payer deux francs par jourSO, pour ma detention dans cette prison. Faites^l m'en sortir : donnez-moi ensuite un franc par jour et vous ins- crirez32 I'autre franc journellement3«i a mon avoir^*. De^s cette maniere, vous me delivrerez36 de ma captivite, vous contribuerez a mon entretien et vous arriverez^T apres un certain temps a eteindreSS le capital que je vous dois." Le creancier comprit39 que son debiteur avait raison^, et le fit mettre*! aussitot en liberte : on ne sait pas^2 toutefois s'il lui accorda la pension qu'il lui demandait, ni combien de temp 8^3 il la lui pay a. 1 etait parti, Tmd gone, 2 qu', when, 3 vu, seen, 4 de loin, in the distance, 5 se passait, was passing, 6 accoiuut, ran, 7 s'empara, took 2^ossession, 8 les remplaga par, put in their place, 9 piteuse, pitiful, 10 ne pouvant, not being able, 11 savoir, knowing, 12 passee, parsed, 13 revint, come back, 14 voyant, seeing, 15 h la place, in the place, 16 s'ecria-t-il, he exclaimed, 17 decrochant, unhangiyig, 18 disant, saying, 19 renvoyes, sent back, 20 voie, conveyance. 21 fit appeler, sent for, 22 dit-il, he said, 23 vouloir, wishing, 24 je ne puis, / cannot, 25 k, of, 26 faites, make, 27 h, cause de nioi, on my account, 28 voulu, wished, 29 etait venue, had come, 30 par jour, a day, 31 faites, cause, 32 inscrirez, ivill put down, 33 jour- nellement, daily, 34 avoir, credit, 35 de, in, 36 delivrerez, willfreey 37 vous arriverez ... a, you will succeed ... in, 38 eteindre, to pay offy 39 comprit, understood, 40 avait raison, was right, 41 fit mettre, caused to be 2nU, 42 on ne sait pas, it is not known, 43 combien de temps, how long. 116 Twenty-fifth Lesson. Vingt-cinqmeme Legon. PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions are words placed before nouns, pronouns or verbs (in the Infinitive) to indicate the relations of these words with other words which precede. They can be divided into nine classes, viz : place, order, union, separation, opposition, purpose, cause, means and specification. (This division we give here for reference only). Prepositions of place are : dans, into, in ; en, in ; hers, out ; devant, before; derrihre, behind; sur, on, upon; sous, under; parnii, among ; entre, between ; vers, towards. Prepositions of order are : avant, before; aprhs, after; dcpuis, since; jusqu'd, as far as, till. Prepositions of union are : avec, with ; durant, during ; pendant, during, for ; outre, besides ; selon, according to ; suivant, according to. Prepositions of separation are: sans, without; excepte, except; Aor?/us, save. Prepositions of opposition are: contre, against; malgrS, in spite of; nonobstant, notwithstanding. Prepasitions of purpose are : envers, towards ; touchant, about ; pour, for. Prepositions of cause and means are : par, by ; moyennant, by means of; attendee, considering. Prepositions of specification are: A, to; de, of; en, in. Remarks 1. — Besides these prepositions, which may be called simple, tliere are many others, composed mostly with the pre- position d, a noun or an adverb , and the preposition de. This is a list of some of these expressions : d, cause de, on account of d cdte de, by d fleur de, level with d force de, by dint of d regard de, with regard to, towards d Vinsu de, unknown to d raison de, at the rate of d rebours de, contrary to d travers de, through au deld de, on that side, beyond au dedans de, within au dehors de, without 2. — There are some other prepositions composed in a similar manner but without the preposition d; as, au dessous de, under au dessus de, over au devant de, before au derritre de, behind au lieu de, instead of au milieu de, amidst, middle of au moyen de, by means of au niveau de, even with auprhs de, near autour de, around au travers de, through, Jcg. the en de<^a de, on this side ffn depit de, in spite of faute de, for want of 3. visdvis de, opposite to, ct-c. tout prds de, close to proche de, near hors de, out of le long de,alonghy pr^ de, near There are four prepositions which have d instead of de; viz : ju^qu'd, as far as ; conformSment d, according to ; quant d, as to ; par rapport d, with regard to. 4. — Prepositions in French are always followed by the In- finitive. — Je suis curieux de le voir. I am curious of seeing it. Exception. — The preposition en which before verbs generally tn^na- lates by, is the only one which governs the present participle. Vona rapprendrez en parlant. You will learn it by speakings 117 back, dos m. ban, ban m. bunch, grappef, cburch, iglisef. consent, consentement m. critical, critique to cross, traverser cupboard, buffet m. fruit, fruit m. grapes, raisin m. impediment, em, ment m. to live, demeurer marriage, mariage un- natural, naturel nor, ni to ^axdiOn, pardonner to publish, puhlier to relish, savourer to resist, resister to return, retoitrner severe, severe to succeed, reussir temptation, tentationf. to travel, voyager unhappy, malheureux Exercise No. 25. 1. He is in the street. — She was before the door. — His house is be- tween the church and your cousin's house. — We walked i(imperfect{*) towards Paris. — The cat is under the table. — The grapes are on the cupboard. — You will speak before him. — We shall walk as far as the town. — They were {imp.) with us. — I like them all, except your friend. They vfQxe{imp. ) without money. — He has done^ that in spite of me. This parcel is for your sister. — I have spoken to your aunt of this business. He was(im^.) ^y in^- — The water was {imp.) nearly level with the street. He learns by dint of application. — We walked(^as< definite) at the rate of four miles an^ hour. — His garden is on that side of the river. — I found {p. d.) him under a tree. — He will be here instead of his brother. — We shall walk around the garden. — The street was {imp.) built along the river. — He lives close to the church. — His house is opposite to ours. (t)Eeceive {s.) — do not love — render {p.) — speak (s.) — let us render — let us sing — love {s.) — do not speak — let us walk — do not receive — love {p.) — let us cross — punish (s.) — let us finish — build (s.) — let us re- sist — do not punish — resist {p.) — render (s.) — do not sing — pardon {$.) — receive {p.) — finish (s.) — let us pardon — cross {p.) — let us receive — build {p.) — let us punish — do not render — punish (p.) — speak {jft.) — let us love. 2. Mon oncle est venu au devant de' moi. Son mariage a ete conclu^ malgre mes objections. J'ai achete ces fruits pres de I'eglise. H a chante au lieu de son cousin. On ne pent'' rien apprendre'' sans travailler. Nous sommes venus^ en marchant le long de la riviere. Ce village est situe en de9k de la montagne. H a resiste en depit de la tentation. Le buffet etait entre les deux fenetres. My brother was {imp.) with me in the garden all the afternoon. He does not succeed for want of application. Sit down^ close to me. Pay him that money at the rate of ten francs a'' month. Walk about^" two hours and you will arrive on that side of the mountain. 1 done, fait 2 an, par 3 est venu au devant de, has come to meet 4 conclu, con- cluded 5 peut, can 6 appreiulre, to learn 7 sommts venus, have come 8 sit down, asseyez-vous 9 a, par 10 about, environ (*) As the past definite has been given in the preceding lesson, we shall now indi- cate when the English past will have to be translated either by the past definite or by the Imperfect. (t) See for the Imperative of the four conjugations (Supplement, p.p. 10 to 13). 118 Questions on Grammar. 1. "What are prepositions ? 2. Into how many classes can prepositions be divided? 3. Give the principal prepositions of place. • » 4. Translate before and after as prepositions of order. 5. What are the principal prepositions of union and separation? 6. Translate against, m spite of. 7. Give the principal prepositions of purpose, cause and means. 8. What are the prepositions of specification? 9. Translate on account of unknown to, contrary to. 10. Give some compound prepositions, which do not begin with the preposition d. 11. What is the preposition which is the last word of nearly every com- pound preposition ? 12. What are the foiu* compound prepositions which end with A instead oidel 13. What mood do prepositions govern in French? 14. What is the only preposition which governs the present participle? Conversation. In what room do you live? I live in the loom of the second floor between yours and my brother's. Can you see (pouvez-vous voir) far beyond the wall of the garden ? I can see (je peux voir) the park and all the houses built along the river. How long will you stay with them? Till the end of the month. How did you learn {avez-voics ap' pris) French so well? Cy dint of perseverance, by means of agoodgranniidrand by taking advantage of every opportunity I found to speak it. How long did you loam it ? I learned it {ai appi is) for two years 8>nd a half? Dans quelle chambre demeurez- vous? Je demeure dans la chambre du deuxieme etage, entre la v6tre et oelle de mon frere. Pouvez-vous voir loin au delh, du mur du jardin ? Je peux voir le pare et toutes lea maisons baties le long de la riviere. Combien de temps resterez-vous avec eux? Jusqu'^ la fin du mois. Comment avez-vous si bien appris le fran9ais ? A force de perseverance, au moyen dune bonne grnmmaire et en profitant de toures Ics occasions que je trouvais dvj h pnrjer. Combien de temps I'avez-vous ap- pris ? Je I'ai a]ipri.^ pendant deux ana et duuii. 119 Reading Exercise No. 25. Un ecolierl revenait2 de I'eglise, ou il avait entendu' publier des bans de mariage. En traversant le refectoire il vit* sur le buffet des raisins magnifiques, et ne pouvant^ resister h la tentation 11 en prit<^ un; puis se rappelant^ la maniere dont^ les bans avaient ete publies, et ne se croyant^ vu^O, ni entenduil de personne, il dit : " II y al2 promesse de manage entre cette grappe de raisin^ et ma bouche: toute personne qui connaitraiti3 quelque empechement a ce futur mariage est tenue^* de le faire savoiris avant la cele- bration." Alors il savoura le fruit qui, tres bon naturelle- ment, avait en outre Tattrait^^ du fruit defendul^. Mal- heureusement le directeur I'avait aperguis et entendu a travers une fenetre entr'ouvertel^ et quelques instants apr^s il le faisait venir20 dans son cabinet2i, et sans autre pream- bule22, il s'ecriait23 en brandissant24 une verge25 : "II y a promesse de mariage entre cette verge et votre dos : toute personne qui connaitrait quelque empechement a ce futur mariage est tenue de le faire savoir avant la celebration." Toutefois, dans ce moment critique, I'ecolier ne perdit26 pas son sang-froid27 et avant que le bras vengeur28 ne fut retombe29 sur lui: *'Arretez, Monsieur le Directeur," s'ecria-t-il, " je connais^o un empechement au mariage pro- jete^l: c'est qu'une des deux parties interessees32 n'y donne pas son consentement." Cette repartie33 desarma^* la colere du maitre, qui pardonna a I'ecolier, apres I'avoir ce- pendant severement admoneste^s. 1 icolier, school boy, 2 revenait, was coining back, 3 entendu, heard, 4 vit, saw, 5 ne pouvant, not being able, 6 prit, took, 7 se rappelant, remembering, 8 dont, in which, 9 croyant, believing, 10 vu, seen, 11 entendu, heard. \2il y a, there is, 13 cann/iUrait, would know, 14 tcnue, bound, 15 faire savoir, make known, 16 attrait, attraction, 17 defendu, forbidden, 18 apergu, perceived, 19 entr'ouverte, ajar, 20 faisait venir, made him come, 21 cabinet, study, 22 pr^ambule, preamble, 23 s'ecriait, exclaimed, 24 bran- dissant, brandishing, 25 verge, rod, 26 perdit, lost, 27 sang-froid, coolness, 28 ■y^H^rcwr, avenging, 29/ii^ retom&e, had fallen, SO connais, know, 31 projcle, projected, 32 interessies, interested, 33 repartiCf reply, 84 desarma, disarmed, 35 admonest4, admonished. 120 Twenty-sixth Lesson. Vingt-sixieme Legon, Conjunctions. Conjunctions are so called because they join together sen- tences or the different parts of sentences. There are two kinds of conjunctions : simple coiijunctionsj which consist of one word only, and compound conjunctions. Government of Conjunctions. Conjunctions govern either the infinitive, indicative or sub- junctive. Those governing the infinitive are formed with the prepositioii cZe, as, ajin de, in order to; d moins de, unless ; avant de, before ; au lieu de, instead of ; de crainte de, for fear that, ($)C. II Vint me voir avant de partir. He came to see me before leaving. In order to use an infinitive after a conjunction, it is neces- sary that this infinitive should refer to the subject of the princi j)al sentence, as in the above example, which would not be correct if partir should refer to me instead of il. As a rule, simple conjunctions all govern the indicative. Je parlerai si vous voulez. I shall speak if you like. Je pense, done je suis. I think, then I exist. Je viendrai quand il sera ici. I shall come when he is here. The following conjunctions, all formed with the conjunction que, govern the subjunctive : afi7i que, in order that d moins que, unless avant que, before au cas que, in case that bien que, though, although de crainte que, lest depeur que, for fear that encore que, though jusqu'd ce que, till, until loin que, far from malgre que, although non pas que, not that pour que, in order that pourvu que, provided that quoique, although sans que, without soit que, whether sujjpose que, suppose that The conjunction g-wg, that, governs the subjunctive after verba used negatively, and also verbs which imply an idea of fear, doubt, emotion, uncertainty, wish or command, and impersonal verbs. (*) Je desire qu'il vienne. I wish that he may com^. Je ne veux pas qu'il parte. I do not wish Am to go. II faut que vous parliez. You must speak. A moins que, unless, de crainte que, de peur que, lest, for fear that, always require the verb that follows them to be preceded by the particle ne. A moins qu'il ne vienne. Unless he should come. De peur qu'il ne -parte. For fear that he would leave. After Avant que the verb may be preceded by ne. Iteviendra-t-il avant queje ne sorte f Will he return before I go out t (•j Rules about the use of the Subjunctive are given iu full in Lesson 74, page 294. to answer, repondre to assign, assigncr bet, pari 7n. to continue, continucr definite, defini to gain, gagner gesture, geste m. to increase, accroUre to indicate, indiquer 121 interval, intervalle m. to inundate, inonder market, marcM m. mud, bouef. pace, pas m. praise, doge m. to pretend, pretendre prey, proief. reign, r^gne m. to remain, demeurer to roll, rouler to sell, vendre soil, soZ m. sonorous, sonore speech, discours m. unbecoming, mals4ant Exercise No. 26. 1. In order to speak. — Before answering. — If you like. — Wben you sing. — In order that you may arrive(*). — Unless you pretend. — Before you continue, — In case that he may sell his horse. — Although you indicate to me his house. — Lest you fall. — For fear that you recom- mence. — Though you are very prudent. — Till he answers. — Although he has no fortune. — Although he speaks perfectly. — Not that I am satisfied. — In order that he may sell it. — Provided that we give him that. — Although it is late. — Without your buying anything. — "Whether they are ill. — Suppose that he is absent. (*)That you may love — that I might love — that he may not love — that we might not love — that I may sing — that we might love — that we may sing — that thou mightest love — that he may walk — that thou mayest love — that they (m. ) might love — that you may not love — that we might continue — that he may love — that you might love — that they (f.) might not love — that he may sing — that we may love — that I may love — that he might love — that we may give — that he may not remain. 2. Je continuerai pourvu que vous me donniez votre opinion. Soit que vous soyez indiscret, ou que vous agissiez imprudemment il ne vous aime pas. Je viendrai^ en cas que vous soyez k la maison^. Bien que vous ne I'aimiez pas, il parle toujours bien de vous. Je vous don- nerai une lettre afin que vous la lui donniez. II nous apporte toujours des fruits, quoique je ne les aime pas beaucoup. Je lui donno pen de travail, afin qu'il ait le temps d'aUer 70us voir'. Je pars^ de peur qu'il ne m'attende. Speak to him in order that lie may give it (m.) to my brother. I like him although he speaks badly of me. I will remain untQ your uncle arrives. I refuse whether he is satisfied or not^. Send it im- mediately lest he will receive (pres. suhj.) it too late. I lend it (f.) to you until I commence my lessons. I say^ it to you in order that you may buy some in the^ market. This coat is good although it is very cheap. 1 viendrai, will come 2 dila maison. at home 8 d'aller vous voir, to go and see you 4 Tpo,rs, leave 5 not, non 6 I say, je dis 7 in the, av, (*) See Supplt. for the Subjunctive of verbs Pages 6 tol3. 122 Questions on Grammar. 1. Why are conjunctions so called? 2. How many kinds of conjunctions are there? 8. What moods do conjunctions govern in French ? 4. Which are the conjunctions which govern the Infinitive? 5. What is the condition required to use the Infinitive after con- junctions ? 6. What are the conjunctions which govern the Indicative! 7. How are the conjunctions formed which govern the Subjunctive? 8. Give some of the conjunctions which govern the Subjunctive? 9 When does the conjunction que govern the Subjunctive ? 10. What are the conjunctions which require the particle iu to be placed before the verb that follows quel What will you do this morning before you go to your office ? I shall write a letter in order to know if I must go and see my uncle this evening. Wi^l 70U take me with you if you gof With great pleasure, unless Mr X. should accompany me. Will you come back before I go to bed? I do not know, although I shall do my best in order to be here as soon as Conversation. Que ferez-vous ce matin, avant d'aller ^ votre bureau ? J'^crirai une lettre afin de savoir si je dois aller voir mon oncle dans la soiree. Voulez-vous m'emmener avec vous si vous y allez ? In case that I should go with you, could you tell me what train you intend to take in order that I might meet you at the station. It will be six o'clock before I am able to leave the office ; although I should like very much to leave earlier. Then I shall be at the station at half past six. Do you take much luggage with you? No, I only take a very small port- manteau. Avec grand plaisir, k moins que Monsieur X. ne m'accompagne. Reviendrez-vous avant que j'aille me coucher? Je ne sais pas, quoique je veuille faire de mon mieux pour etre ici le plus t6t possible. Au cas que j'aille avec vous, pour- riez-vous me dire quel train vous avez I'intention de prendre afin que je puisse vous rencon- trer k la station. II sera six heurcs avant que je puisse quitter le bureau ; quoi- que je desire beaucoup le quitter plus t6t. Je serai done k la station & six heures et demie. Emportez-vous beaucoup de ba- Kon, je ne prends qu'un tr^ petit porte-manteau. 123 Reading Exercise No. 26. Le doctenr Samuel Jolmson fit,! un jour un pari aveo Tun de ses amis: il prutendait qu'il irait2 au marche de poissons de Billingsgate et qu'il mettrait^ une des mar- cliandes* en colere, sans dire^ un mot qu'elle put6 com- prendre.7 II s'y rendits en effet^ et s'etant mislO a quel- ques pas d'une de ces dames, il se boucliail le nez avec affectation pour indiquer que le poisson qu'elle vendait n'etait pas plus fraisi2 qu'il ne fallait^^. Le geste ne de- meura pas inapergul*, et le docteur fut inonde d'epithetesis aussi sonores que malseantes, la derniere desquelles assi- gnait a la mere du docteur une place bien definie dans le regne des quadrupedes^6. j^e docteur luirepondit: '*Vous etes un article, Madame!" — "Pas plus article que vous- memei7, rustre mal elevens." — ''Madame vous etes un substantif." — ''Et vous ... vous ... vous," begaya^^ la virago20, a qui la colore de se voir insultee^l en des termes inconnus22 6tait23 deja I'usage de la parole^*. — "Vous etes un pronom ! " La marchande ecuma de25 rage, mais ne put proferer que26 des sons inarticules27. — " Yous etes un verbe, un participe, un adverbe, un adjectif, une conjonction, une preposition, une interjection, continua Johnson en Ian9ant28 chacun de ces mots, par intervalle, de fagon a29 en accroitre la portee^o. L'enumeration des dix parties da discours, n'avait jamais produit^l un effet aussi formidable; a la dixieme, la dame de Billingsgate se roulait dans la boue qui couvrait32 le sol, en proie a de veritables convulsions : Johnson avait gagne son pari. 1 fit, made, 2 irait, would go, 3 mettrait, would put, 4 www- fhaiideSy stall-keepers, 5 dire, saying, 6 pM, could, 7 comprendre^ understand, 8 s't/ rendit, betook himself there, 9 en effet, in fact, 10 s'etant mis, having placed himself, 11 toucha, stopped, 12 plus frais, sweeter, IS qu'il nefallait, than it was necessary, liinaper(^u, unperceived, 15 d'epitMtes, with epithets, 16 quadrupMes, quadru- peds, 17 vous-miTne, yourself, 18 rustre mal 6lev^., villanous scoun- drel, 19 Mgaya, stammered, 20 virago, virago, 21 se voir insultie, seeing herself abused, 22 ineonnus, unknown, 23 6tait, took away, 24 Vtisage de la parole, the faculty of speaking, 25 6cuma de, foamed with, 26 ne pui profirer que, could only utter, 27 inarticules, inar- ticulate, 28 langant, casting, 29 defat^on d, in such a manner as to, %^laporUe^ the ellect, ^\ prod nit, produced, S2 couvrait, covered. 124 Twenty-seventh Lesson. Vingt-septieme Legon. Conjunctions C continued). (This lesson is for reference only.) Besides their division into simple and compound, conjunctions are also di^dded into copulative, augmentative, alternative, hypo- thetic, adversative, extensive, periodical, causative, conclusive, explica- tive, transitive and conductive. I. — Copulative conjunctions merely connect without adding any- thing to the idea ; there are two of them : et, and, ni, neither, nor. II. — ^wgf7/w7itelus, Men plus, au surplus, moreover; d'ailleurs, outre que, besides; encore, still. III. — Alternative imply an idea of alternative or distinction they are as follow : ow, or ; ou Men, either ; sinon, if not ; tantdt, sometimes. lY. — Hypothetic or conditional conjunctions imply the idea of a condition without which what is meant by the principal sentence ceases to take place. The principal are the following : si, if, whether ; soil que, whether ; pourvu que, provided that ; d moins que, unless ; quand, when ; d condition que, under the condition that ; en cos que, in case that ; suppos6 que, suppose that. V. — Adversative conjunctions are those which indicate some dif- ference, opposition or restriction between Avliat precedes and what fol- lows them, as, mais, but ; quoique, although ; Men que, though ; ce- pendant, however; neannioins, nevertheless; toutefois, however; de peur qv^, de crainte que, lest, for fear that, <0c. VI. — Extensive conjunctions connect while enlarging the idea. They are : jusqiCh ce que, till ; encore, still ; enfm, at last ; aussi, also ; mime, even ; tant, so much. YII. — Periodical conjunctions refer to a certain period or time, as: quand, lorsque, when ; dans le temp)S que, at the time when ; pcndaiit que, durant que, while ; tandis que, whilst ; tant que, as long as ; aussi- idt que, as soon as ; d^ que, since ; avant que, before ; depuis que, since ; aprds que, after ; d peine, hardly, cfcc. VIII. — Causative conjunctions imjily an idea of cause or motive, as, afn que, in order that ; parce que, because ; comme, as ; car, for ; puisque, since; d'autant que, whereas; au^si, also; attendu que, con- sidering tliat. IX. — ConclvMve conjunctions deduce a conclusion from a preceding sentence, as, or, now ; done, then ; par consequent, consequently ; c'est pourquoi, therefore. X. — Eiplicative conjunctions connect two sentences while con- reying furtlier explanations, as, comme, as; en tant que, as; savMr, c'est-d-dire, that is to say; surtout, above all; desorte que, defaqonquCf so that ; si Men que, so that. XI. — Transitive conjunctions imply the idea of transition, as: or, now ; au reste, besides ; du reste, moreover ; apr^ tout, after all ; quant d, as for, as to. 125 all at once, tout de suite American, amAricain to declare, declarer detail, detail m. England, Angleterre f. extraordinary, extra- ordinaire fact, fait m. feat, prouessef. journey, voyage m. lie, mensonge m. matter, matieref. ocean, ocian tn. once, unefois passenger, j^ctssager m. pigeon, pigeon m. port, port m. precise, prdcis to relate, raconter to remark, remarqiier to repeat, r6p6ter skill, adrcsscf. steamboat, hateau-d^ vdpeur m. story, histoiref. to talk, causer triumph, triompTie m. turn, tour m. United - States, EtatS' Unis m. Exercise No. 27. 1. The cat and the dog. — I remark and I repeat. — Neither you nor I. — Neither my brother nor my sister. — Moreover he has much skill. — Besides I have visited^ all the ports of the Ocean. — Either you or I. —If not I shall go^ to the United States.— If you like. —Whether you are satisfied or not. — Unless you repeat it. — When you would be here. — But he is an honest man.— Although you are my brotlier. — However you are discontented.— Lest he should be ill. — Till you are old. — When I was at Paris. — While he was young. —As soon as you come^. — After he had finished. —Because it is extraordinary. — As you know*. (*)That we may punish— that I might punish— that you may receive — that he might not receive— that thou mightest not punish— that they (m.J might punish — that I may receive — that she may receive— that I might not receive — that he may punish — that we might punish — that you might receive — that we may receive — that they (7n.) might not re- ceive — that you may punish — that you might punish — that they (f.J may receive— that she may not receive— that thou mayest punish — that he might punish— that they (f.J may punish. 2. Je parlerai k votre ami et je lui dirai" de venir^ demain matin. Je n'aime ni son frke ni sa soeur. Ou bien vous me donnerez celui- Ik, ou bien j'en acheterai un autre. Yous finirez votre travail, sinon vous serez puni. Tant6t H arrivait par le bateau k vapeur, tant6t il venait par le chemin de fer^. Je repeterai cette regie si vous le trouvez neces- Baire. Quoique vous lui ayez raconte ce voyage extraordinaire il ne vous a pas cru^. AussitSt que vous aurez fini de causer, je parlerai Je dis' cela afin que vous soyez prudent. We shall commence our journey all at once for fear that the weather might be^" too bad if we should wait^^ till Saturday. If you repeat this extraordinary story, people will think that you are an impostor. He s very learned, however he is very modest. I shall punish him because he has talked during the lesson, I shall remain until he comes back^^ from his journey. Sometimes I find it easy, sometimes I find it difiicult. 1 visited, t*i.si«c 2 I shall go, j'irai 3 come, viendrez 4 knovf, savez 5 dirai, shall tell C^ de venir, to come 7 chemin defer, Ta.ilway 8 en;, believed 9 dis, say 10 -would be, ne soii 11 should wait, aitcndions 12 comes ha.ck, revienne (*) See Supplt lor the subjupctive of verbs of the 2nd audSrd Coiyugatious (Pages 11 and 12; 1126 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Questions on Grammar > How also can conjunctions be divided ? Is there any idea implied in copulative conjunctions ? what are theyf What is the idea implied in augmentative conjunctions ? give soma What idea do alternative conjunctions imply ? what are they ? What do hypothetic or conditional conjunctions imply ? give some. What are adversative conjunctions ? give some. What is the effect of extensive conjunctions ? give some. To what diO periodical conjunctions refer ? give some. What is the idea implied in causative conjunctions ? give some. What is deduced by conclusive conjunctions ? give some. How do explicative conjunctions connect two sentences ? give some, What is the idea implied in transitive conjunctions ? give some. Conversation. Did you bring your brother and sister with you ? I brought neitlier the one nor the other, but they will come this afternoon. When will you go to Paris ? I shall go there either in August or in September. Though yoa are very busy, I should like you to pay us a visit in the country. Could you come next Saturday ? I cannot tell you until I have seen my partner, but I shall let you know before Friday. Will you come and see my father while I am away ? 1 shall come and see him every Sunday, if not twice a week. I should like you also to write to me often. I shall do so under the condition that you will answer me im- mediately. Have you bought a house since I saw you last week ? Yes, I bought one the day before yesterday. Avez-vous amene votre frere et votre soiur avec vous ? Je n'ai amene ni I'un ni I'autre, mais ils viendront cette apres- midi. Quand irez-vous k Paris ? J'irai soit en aout, soit en sep- tembre. Quoique vous soyez tres occup6, je voudrais que vous nous fissiez nne visite a la campagne. Pour- riez-vous venir suniedi prochain ? Je ne puis vous le dire, jusqu'a ce que j'aie vu mon associe, mais je vous le ferai savoir avant ven- dredi. Viendrcz-vous voir mon pere, tan- dis que je serai absent ? Je viendrai le voir chaque di- manche, sinon deux fois par semaine. J'aimerais aussi que vous m'ecri- vissiez souvent. Je le ferai, a la ccmdition que vous me repondiez imraediatement. Avez-vous achete nne maison de- puis que je vous ai vu la semaine derniere ? Oui, j'en ai achete une avant-hier. Reading Exercise No, 27. Pendant le dernier voyage d'un bateau h vapeur qui fait le servicei entre I'Angleterre et les Etats-Unis, deux passagers, Tun Anglais et I'autre Americain, causaient de prouesses en matiere de force et d'adresse, Tout-a-coup, et apres avoir parle des exploits^ des autres, FAmericain declara qu'il lui etait arrive^ une fois de tirer* neuf cent- qualre-vingt-dix-neuf pigeons, I'un apres I'autre. *'Pour- quoi pas niille?" remarqua son interlocuteur. — '' J'ai dit^ neuf cent-quatre-vingt-dix-neuf," repeta FAmericain d'un air vexe.6 "Je ne ferais^ certainement pas un mensonge pour un pigeon." Ce fut alors le tour de FAnglais qui raconta aveo des details tres circonstancies,^ le fait extra- ordinaire d'un homme qui avait nage^ tout le temps de Liverpool a Boston. "L'avez-vous vuio?" demanda FAmericain : " Si je Fai vu? je faisaisH precisement comme aujourd'hui la traverseel2 de I'Ocean, et nous passames tout pres de luiis al* quelques milles du port de Boston." — "Eh bienlSI Monsieur," s'ecriais FAmericain, d'unl7 air de triomphe "je suis bien heureux que vous I'ayez vulS; c'etait moi ; et, desormaisl^, si quelqu'un a l'air20 de douter21 de la veracite de cette histoire, j'en appellerai22 a votre temoignage23, puisque vous avez ete temoin oculaire24 de mon exploit. 1 fait le service, plies, 2 exploits, exploits, 3 itait arriv4, had happened 4 tirer, to shoot, 5 fai dit, I have said, 6 i^x4, vexed, 7 /crais, would make, S cir constancies, -precise, 9 nage, swam, 10 vu, seen, 11 jefaisais, I was making, 12 la traversee, the (sea) voyage, 13 toutprds de lui, close to him, 14 A, within, 15 eh Men, very well, 16 s'icria, exclaimed, 17 d\ with, 18 ayez vu, have seen, 19 di- 807'mais, henceforth, 20 a Vair, seems, 21 de douter, to suspect, 22 fen appellerai, I shall appeal, 23 temoignage, testimony, 23 t6moin oculaire, eye witness. 128 Twenty-eighth Lesson. Vingt-huitidme Leqon Conjunctions (concluded). XTI. — The conductive conjunction, which is so called because it conducts the sentence to its perfection, is the conjunction que, that. (See Lesson 26). Que conjunction must not be confounded with que adverb and qu^ relative or interrogative pronoun. Que is an adverb at the beginning of the second term of a com- parison, and translates as, than. II est plus riche que moi. He is richer than I. 11 est aussi savant que sonfr^re. He is as learned as his brother. Qus is also adverb, when joined to Tie, in the meaning of only, but, or at the beginning of exclamative sentences in the meaning of how. II n'a que quinze ans. He is but fifteen years old. Que vou^ ites hont How kind you are ! Que is a relative pronoun when it is preceded by a noun or pro- noun, called its antecedent, and translates whom or which. Lhomme que vous connaissez. The man whom you know. Ze livre que vous lisez. The book which you read. Cest le mien que vous avez. It is mine which you have. Que is an interrogative pronoun, when at the beginning of an in- terrogative sentence and translates what. Que voiclez-vous? What do you wish! Interjections, Interjections are words used to express the sudden affections of the mind. They are divided into : 1. Interjections of joy, as, ah! ah! honl well ! 2. grief: aht ah ! helasl alas ! ale I oufl dear me I 3. fear : ah I ah ! ohl o\i\ 4. aversion : fi! fi done! fie ! 5. consent : soiti let it be so ! 6. derision : bah I pshaw ! 7. surprise : eh I eh bienl hi! ah ! halloo I 8. to encourage : allonsi courage! <^a! come on! cheer up I 9. to warn: grare/ beware! hola I hoa! hoy! 10. to call: hola! \ioa.\ hoy! hi! q\\\ 11. to impose silence : cAw^/hush! 12. to applaud: 5raw/ bravo! hurrah! Note. — Oh is spelled 6 before nouns and pronouns: 6 Dieul Oh God ! d monpire/ Oh my father! 6 voiis\ Oh you I 129 apartment, apparte- ment m. ape, singe m. blow, coup m. cane, cannef. coach, voituref. comedy, comedief. to consist, consister to dress, hahiller eflfort, effort m. empire, empire m. to employ, employer to exasperate, exasperer extreme, extreme face, figure f. German, allemand to increase, augmenter inn, aubergef. means, moyen m. to open, ouvrir to oppose, opposer philosopher, phzlosophe TTi. to prepare, preparer proceeding, procede m. to protest, protester Prussia, Prussef. to try, essayer Exercise No. 28. 1. I think that his face is very beautiful. — I do not think that the coach stops^ at the inn. — He is more learned than his brother. — He has but one brother. — How patient you arel — The professor whom you know^. — The news which he received (past def.). — It is she whom he liked (imp.) best. — "Well ! I am very satisfied. — Alas ! his father is dead. Fie ! what have you done^? — Let it be so ! I accept it. — Halloo ! where are you? — Come on, my friends ! — Beware, the passage is very dangerous. Hoa! come this way*. — Hush! your mother sleeps^ (*)That we may return — that he might return — that they f/".j may return — that he might not return — that I may return — that we might return — that she may not return — that I might return — that he may not return — that you may return — that you might not return — that she may not return — that you might return — that we might not return^. tHat they (m. ) may return — that thou mayest return. 2. Je desire que vous alliez^ voir^ cette comedie. Je ne trouve pas que cette dame habille ses enfants avec beaucoup de gout. Les fleurs que vous avez dans votre jardin sont tres belles. Les amis que vous avez sont trfes fidMes. Que vous etes heureux ! Je n'ai quo deux heures k demeurer avec vous. Que desirez-vous? Je desire que vous soyez heureux. Helas ! il a perdu^ toute sa fortune. Hoik ! votre p^re est dans la chambre et il desire que vous veniez*. Courage ! vous aurez bient6t fini votre travail. Bravo ! vos efforts seront recompenses. Silence I votre frfere dort^". Fi done ! vous avez fait^^ une mauvaise action. I believe^^ that he will be exasperated : he will protest against sucl"^ proceedings. Prussia is but one part of the German empire. H apartment consists of^* four rooms rather^" large than small. Ho\ beautiful those flowers are. Beware, the ape bites^^. Let it be so, 1 shall give you ten francs for this cane. Hush ! you will increase his grief if you speak to him of his misfortune. " stops, ^arrite 2 know, connaissez 8 done, fait 4 come this way, venez far id 5 sleeps, dort 6 alUez, may go 7 voir, to see 8 perdu, lost veniez, should come 10 dort, sleeps 11 fait, done 12 believe, crois 13 such, de tels, 14 of, en 15 rather, plutot 16 bites, inord (*) See Supplt. for the subjunctive of verbs of the 4th conjugation Page la, French Grammar. 5 130 Questions on Grammar. 1. What is the conductive conjunction ? 2. Why is it so called? 3. What are the words with which que conjunction must not be ecu- founded ? 4. When is que an adverb ? 5. When is qu^e a relative pronoun ? 6. When is que an interrogative pronoun? 7 What are interjections ? 8. Give the interjections of joy, grief, fear, and aversion. 9. Give the interjections of consent, derision, surprise, encouragement. 10. What are the interjections used to warn, to cally to silcrvce^ to ap- plaud f Conversation. What do you require? I wish you to go to the bank to bring that money. My brother has more time than I; would you allow him to go there instead of me ? Let it be so ! but tell him to go at once. Come on ! be quick and do not remain too long away. When do you think you will be back ? I do not think that I shall be away more than ^hree quarters of an hour. Take care ! there is a cab : did you not see it? Yes, but I did not think that there was the slightest danger. Halloo ! where are you going? I am going to the printing office. Ah! have you anything to do there ? Certainly : I must go and correct some proofs. Will you remain thei ^ for a long time? Oh no! I shall only be there a few minutes. Husli ! somebody is sj caking to me and I cannot hea: what * says. Que voulez-vous? Je desire que vous alliez h. la banqua pour porter cet argent. Mon frere a plus de temps que moi ; voulez-vous lui" permettre d'y aller k ma place? Soit ! mais dites-lui d'y aller tout de suite. Aliens! depechez-vous et ne res- tez pas trop longtemps absent. Quand pensez-vous que vous serez de retour? Je ne pense pas que je sois absent plus de trois quarts d'heure. Gare ! voila un fiacre : ne I'aviez- vous pas vu ? Si, mais je ne pensais pas qu'il y efit le moindre danger. Hoik ! ou allez-vous ? Je vais h. Timprimerie. Ah ! avez-vous (juelque chose k j faire ? Certainement : il faut que j'aille corriger quelques epreuves. Y resterez- vous longtemps? Oh non ! je n'y resterai que quel- ques minutes. Chut ! quelqu'un me parle et je ne peux pas entendre c« qu' U me dit. 181 Reading Exercise No- 28. Lorsque Frederic le Grand, roi de Prusse, allait faire^ de petites excursions, il emmenait2 souvent Voltaire aveo lui. 11 arrival done qu'une fois^ le roi s'etant confonnu^ a cette habitude, que le pliilosophe le suivait^ seul dans una voiture. Or un jeune page, que Voltaire avait fait punir7 severement, quelques jours auparavant, avait resolu* de se venger,9 et comme le serviceio du jeune homme consistait a precederll le roi, et a voirl2 si les relaisl-^ avaient ete prepares, il raconta a tons les maitres-de-postel* que le roi avait un vieux singe qu'il aimait beaucoup, qu'il habillait comme un gentilhommeis et qu'il emmenait dans ses voyages. "L'animal," disait-iU6, <'ne connait quel7 Sa Majeste; il est tres-mechantis, et s'il voulaitl^ essayer de sortir20 de sa voiture, il faudrait2i employer tous les moyens pour Ten empecher22." Chaque fois done que^s Voltaire arrivait a une maison de poste24 et voulait25 des- cendre26 de voiture, les gens27 de Tauberge s'opposaient a ses efforts : plusieurs fois meme28, comme il sortait29 la main pour ouvrir la portiere^o, il reQut sur les doigts de bons coups de canne, h la risee^l des assistants. Voltaire ne savait32 pas un mot d'Allemand et ne pouvait^s protester centre de pareils^ procedes : sa rage en etait extreme et les contorsions de sa figure augmentaient encore I'liilarite generale: La nouvslle se repandit^s de village en village et tout le monde accourait^s pour voir37 le singe du roi. Cette comedie se ienouvela38 tout le long de la route, et pour exasperer encore la colere de Voltaire, le roi trouva le tour39 si bon qu'il ne voulut^o pas que I'auteur en f ut puni. 1 allait /aire, went to make, 2 emmenait, took, 3 il arriva, it happened, 4 une fois, once, 5 sitant conform^ a, having complied with, 6 suivait, followed, 7 avait fait punir, had caused to be punished, 8 r^solu, resolved, 9 de se venger, to rev engehimaeli', 10 service^ duty, 11 d prdceder, in preceding, » 12 d voir, seeing, 13 relais, relays, 14 mattres-de-poste, post-masters, 15 gentilhomme, nobleman, 16 disait-il, he said, IT ne connatt que, knows nobody but, 18 trhs- mechant, very vicious, 19 s'il voulait, if it wishwl, 20 de sortir, to come out, 21 ilfaudrait, it would be necessary, 22 I'en eiapkh&r, to prevent it from doing so, 23 que, when, 24 maison de 2)osle, post house, 25 voulait, wished, 26 descendre, alight, 27 les gens, the servants, 28 m,eine, even, 29 sorlait, put out, 30 la portiere, tli? carriage door, 31 risee, laughing, 32 savait, knew, 33 pouoait, could, 34 de pareils, such, 35 se repandit, spread, 36 accourait, ran 87 voir, to see, 38 se renouvela, was renewe»-t 39 iowr, jokfi, 40 vou 132 Twenty-ninth Lesson. Vingt-neuvieme Legon, Remarks on Verbs. (*) There are certain verbs which, without being irregular, present certain peculiarities in their conjugation. Verbs of the 1st Conjugation. I. — Verbs ending in cer^ take the cedilla under the c before a and o. — Nous pe^ons (from percer), we pierce ; je per<^ais, I pierced. II. — Verbs ending in ger take an e after the g before a and o. Nous mangeons (from manger), we eat ; je mangeais, I ate. III. — Verbs ending in eler and eter double the I or the t before an e mute. Tcqipdle (from appeler), I call ; fappellerai, I shall call. Iljctte [hoYci Jeter), he throws ; nous jctterions, we should throw. Exceptions. — Acheter, to buy; harceler, to harass ; peler, to peel; deceler, to disclose ; bourreler, to torment ; geler, to freeze ; epeler, to spell ; hecqueter, to peck, take the grave accent on the e instead of doubling the consonant. IV. — Verbs having in the infinitive an ^ in the last syllable but one, change that ^ into e before an e mute. tPesphre (from esperer), I hope ; il esperera, he will hope. Verbs having in the infinitive an e unaccented in the last syllable but one, change that e into e before an e mute. Je pdse (from peser), I weigh ; nous Tnhnerons (from mener), we shall lead. V. — Verbs ending in yant in the present participle change y into i before an e mute. Je paie (from payer), I pay ; Us essuient (from essuyer), they wipe ; vous emploierez (from employer), they will employ. Some writers, however, keep the y in verbs in ayer, as payer^ and spell je paye. Verbs of the 2nd Conjugation. Hairy to hate, drops the diajresis in the three persons singular of the Present Indicative : je hais, tu hais, il hait, and in the 2nd person singular of the Imperative hais. Hair is the only verb in French which takes no circumflex accent in the 3rd person singular of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive. Fleurir, to bloom, to flourish, has two present Participles, fieurissant, blooming, and florissant, flourishing, and also two forms for the Imperfect Indicative. ^ B^nir has two past participles; 6^m^, consecrated ; b^ni, blessed. De Vcau hinite^ holy water ; il fut heni par son p^re, he was blessed by his father. Verbs of the 3rd Conjugation. Verbs in cevoir, like recevoir, take the cedilla under c before u : je de'gus, que je congusse. The past participle of devoir is dH to distinguish it from dii^ of the. The feminine is spelt due. (*) See for verba, the Supplement. to accompany, accom- pagner annal, anrialef. astonishment, Uorme- ment in. chief, chefm. combat, combat m. consent, conseniement 183 to degenerate, d4g6nirer devoted, devoui discreet, discret esteem, estimef. exploit, exploit m. to expose, exposer to form, forratr to fulfil, remplir function, foTictionf. guard, garde f. heroine, TUraHne f. love, amour m. nightly, nocturne order, ordre m. report, rapport m. republic, rtpubliqm /. touching, touchant troop, troupe f. uniform, uniforme m. volunteer, volontaire m. Exercise No. 29. 1. I announce — we announce — I announced (imp. ) — ^we announced (p. d.J — he eats — I ate (imp.) — we eat — he ate (p. d.) — that we might eat — thou callest — we call — they call — we shall call — we should call — that I may call — that we might call — I have called — he buys — we buy — I bought (imp.) — I shall buy — we should buy — that I may buy — that we might buy — we had bought — he degenerates — you degenerate — I degenerated (imp.) — he would degenerate — we should degenerate — that he may degenerate — that you may degenerate — I lead — we lead — I led (imp.) — he led (p. d.) — I shall lead — we should lead — that h« may lead— that you may lead — that he might lead — they had led — I pay — we pay — they pay — I paid (imp ) — they paid (p. d.) — I shall pay — we should pay — that I may pay — that you may pay — that I might pay — I hate — they hate — I hated (imp.) — they (m.) hated (p. d.) — hate (thou) — do not hate — I shall hate — we should hate — that I may hate — that we might hate — The trees were blooming (bloomed). — Fine arts^ were flourishing. — His father has blessed him, — The church was consecrated. — I deceive — ^we deceive — ^he received (p, d.) — you received (imp. ) — This is due to me. 2. Nous ne mangeons pas de viande. lis mangeaient trop de fruits. Oh. menez-vous cet enfant. Je le mene dans le jardin. Combien pese cela ? Nous ne hai'ssons personne. II halt cet homme. C'est una nation degeneree. lis degenferent chaque jour davantage. II paierait ses dettes, s'il avait de I'argent. Vous I'emploierez si vous voidez^ me faire* un plaisir. Les arbres fleurissaient dans tons les jardins. Les beaux arts florissaient h. cette ^poque*. lis ont reju une lettre de leurs amis. They ate much meat. "We begin to speak French. He calls you. We shall buy new dresses this afternoon. Do they hope that we shall accompany them ? We announce his death to his parents. They ex- asperate all their friends by their bad conduct. He leads the armies of the Republic to the combat. They call you : go (and) see what they desire. They announced that they would be here this morning. 1 tine ai-ts, les heaUx arts 2 vovXez, wish 8 /aire, to do 4 ipogue, epocli 5 go and see, aiuz uuir 134 Questions on Grammar. i. When do verbs ending in cer take the cedilla under the ct 2. When do verbs ending in ger take e between the root and the ending! 3. When do verbs ending in eler and eter double the I or the t ? 4. What are the principal exceptions to the preceding rule ? 5. What becomes of the 6 of the penultimate syllable before an e mute? 6. What becomes of the e of the penultimate syllable before an e mute ? 7. What becomes of the y. in verbs ending in yavJ, in the present par- ticiples, before an e mute? 8. What irregularity does the verb hair present? 9. What are the two present participles offleurirf 10. What are the two past participles of binirf 11. When do verbs ending in cevoir take the cedilla? 12. What is the spelling of the past participle of devoirt Do you hope to be successful in this enterprise? I hope so. When do you commence? We commence in a few days. What will you have for your break- fast? A little bread and butter and a cup of tea will be sufficient. How much does this fish weigh ? It weighs two pounds and a half. Where do you take your brother? I take him to his grandfather's. How much do you pay for his railway fare? I only pay ten pence. Were the trees blooming when you were in the country ? Yes, they were covered with flowers. Is your cousin in a flourishing position ? I do not know ; but I think he is wery successful in his business. Conversation. Esperez-vous reussir dans cette entreprise ? Je I'espfere. Quand commencez-vous? Nous commen9ons dans quelquei jours. Que voulez-vous pour votre d6« jeuner? Un peu de pain et de beurre et une tasse de the suffiront. Combien p^se ce poisson ? II pfese deux livres et demie. Oh menez-vous votre frere? Je le mfene chez son grand pfere. Combien payez-vous pour lui en chemin de fer? Je ne paie que dix pence. Les arbres fleurissaient-ils quand vous etiez h la campagne ? Oui, ils etaient converts de fleurs. Votre cousin est-il dans une po- sition florissante ? Je ne sais pas ; mais je pense qu'il reussit tres bien dans ses atfaires. 135. Reading Exercise No. 29. On trouve dans les annales des guerres de la premiere republique frangaise un exemple touohant de patriotisme et d'amour filial. Filles d'un ancien officierl qui, a la tete de la garde nationale de son village, faisait de frequentes reconnaissances2 pendant la nuit, Felicite et Tlieophile de Fernig, craignant^ pour leur pere le danger au quel il etait expose dans ces petites expeditions, qui degeneraient souvent en escarmouches,* formerent le projet de I'accom- pagner, sans qu'il le stit,5 revetues d'6 habillements d'liommes,7 que leur avait pretes quelques amis devoues et discrets. EUes mirent^ leur projet a^ execution et pendautio quelque temps, prirent part auxH marches et aux combats nocturnes sans que leur pere s'aper9titl2 de rien. Mais le general Beurnonville, ayant rencontre la petite troupe dont les exploits lui etaient connusl^, voulutl* lui temoig- neris son estime en la passant en revuel^. Quel ne fut pas son etonnement en remarquant que deux des volontaires essayaient de changer de rangl7 pour echapper h. ses re- gardslS: il donna I'ordre a Monsieur de Fernig de les faire sortirl9 des rangs, et se voyant20 decouvertes21, les deux jeune filles tomb^rent aux genoux de leur pere et lui de- manderent pardon22. Sur23 le rapport du general en chef, la Convention envoya aux deux heroines des armes et des chevaux d'honneur. Elles continuerent ensuite a accom- pagner leur pere, avec son consentement, et on les retrouve^^ aux batailles de Valmy et de Jemmapes, remplissant les fonctions d'aides-de-camp du25 general Dumouriez, et re- vetues de26 I'uniforme de cet emploi. 1 ancien offider, ex-officer, 2 faisait des reconnaissances, made reconnoitrings, 3 craignant, fearing, 4 escarmouches, skirmishes, 5 sUt, knew, 6 revUues de, clothed in, 7 habillements d'homme, men's garments, 8 mirent, put, 9 d, in, 10 pendant, for, 11 prirent part aux, took part in, 12 s'aperqUt de rien, discovered anything, 13 connus, known, 14 voulut, wished, 15 t^moign^r, to show, IQ en la passant en revue, by reviewing it, 17 changer de rang, to change their ranks, 18 dses regards, his attention, 19 les faire sortir, to make them come out of, 20 se voyant, seeing themselves, 21 dd- eouvertes, discovered, 22 lui demanddrent pardon, asked for his pardon, 23 sur, on, 24 on les retrouve, they are found again, 25 aides-de-camp du, aides-de-camp to, 26 revitues de, dressed in the. 136 Thirtieth Lesson. Trentieme Le^on, Words with aspirated H. The rules which have been given for articles, demonstrative and possessive adjectives, show the necessity of knowing whether the h found at the beginning of words be aspirated (see lessons 1, 2, 4, 12 and 13). This knowledge is also necessary to ascertain if the final e of monosyllabic words must be elided and if the linking of words has to take place. The following is a list of the words in which the h is aspirated : (*)hS,bler, to brag hache (f.), axe hagard, haggard hachis (m.), hash haie (f.), Iiedge haillon (m.), rag haine (f.), hatr&oL hair, to hate haire (f.), hair-shirt hale, drying wind hale, sunburnt haler, to tow haleter, to pant halle (f.), market-hall hallebarde (f.), halberd hallier (m.), thicket halo (m.), halo halte (f.), halt hamac (m.), hammock hameau (m.), hamlet hampe (f. ), staff hanche (f.), hip hangar (m.), shed hanneton (m.), cock- chafer hanter, to haunt [nag haquen^e (f. ), ambling haquet (m. ), dray happer, to snap harangue (f . ), harangue haras (m.), breeding- stud harasser, to harass harceler, to torment hardes (f. p.), clothes hardi, bold harem (m.), harem hareng (m.), herring hargneux, quarrelsome haricot (m.), French- bean haridelle (f.), hack harnacher, to harness harnais (m.), harness harpe (f.), harp harpie (f.), harpy harpon (m.), harpoon hart (f.), withe hasard (m.), hazard base (f.), doe-hare hate (f.), haste haubans(ni, p. ), shrouds haubert (m.), coa^of- inails hausser, to raise haut, high hautain, haughty hautbois (m.), oboe h^ve, emaciated havre (m.), Imrbour havresac (m. ), knapsack heaume (m.), helmet hennir, to neigh heraut (m. ), herald herisser, to bristle hemie (f. ), hernia heron (m.), Jieron heros(t) (m.), hero herse (f. ), harrow, port- cullis hetre (m.), beech-tree heurter, to clash hibou (m.), owl hideux, hideous hierarchie(f.),^ierarcAy hisser, to hoist hocher, to toss homard (m.), lobster honte (f.), shame hoquet (m. ), hiccough horde (f. ), horde hotte (f.), dorsel houblon (m.), hop houe (f.), hoe houille (f.), coal houle (f.), billow houlette (f.), crook houppe (f.), tuft houppelande (f.), a sort of great coat houspiller, topulldbout housses (f. p.), housings houx (m.), holly huche (f.), kneading- trough huee (f.), hooting huit, eight huguenot (m.), hugut- not burner, to inhale hune (f.), top (marine) huppe (f. ), pewet hure (f. ),unldboarhead hurler, to howl hussard (m.), hussar (*) Words very seldom used aud words derived from those given in this list have been omitted. (t) The h is mute in hiroine, Mroisme and JUroiq^ier 137 accomplice, complicem. afifair, affaire f. arrival, arriveef. to assist, aider to avoid, eviter to claim for, rddamer to contract, uontracter disorder, cUsvrdre m. enemy, ennemi m. to execute, exicuter to facilitate, faciliter heavy, lourd henceforth, dordnavant instead of, au lieu de to live, demeurer miserly, avare moon, lunef. occasion, occasion/. to order, ordonner orgy, orgief. to present, prisenter pretext, pretexte in. prodigal, prodigut rain, pluief. to rehabilitate, ri- hdbiliter reprimand, riprimande /. ripe, mUr scandal, scandale m. shrub, arhuste m. since, puisque spendthrift, teur m. to strike, f rapper study, itudef. Exercise No. 30. (The words beginning with an h aspirated must be looked for in the list on the opposite page. ) 1. J'ordonnerai (k) cet homme de reclamer sa hache. La haie est couverte de^ fleurs. La houille est tres ch^re cette annee. L'habit de mon pfere est trfes bien fait''. Mon ami craignait^ la haine de son en- nemi. II d iit sa fortune au hasard. Le hautbois est un instrument tres difficile II n'y a plus* de houille sous le hangar. Ce hameau est tres joli. Las houblons ne sont pas encore murs. Le herault se tenait' devant la porte. Le soldat le frappa avec sa hallebarde. Le mendiant etait convert de haillons. Le havresac du soldat fran5ais est tres lourd. Leschiens ont p^netre dans le hallier. Sa harangue a ete tres eloquente. Ce hamac est tr^s commode. Je ne le hais pas. Ma hotte est dans le jardin. Le houx est un joli arbuste. Je n'en ai que huit. Le halo que Ton voit^ autour de la lune est generalement un signe de pluie. Avez-vous vu^ la harpe que mon pfere m'a achetee. 2. The herald announced the arrival of the hero. This man's dog is there. The shed is full of rags. I do not hate my enemies. The river is bordered with^ beech-trees. They have no housings. Do not strike this" poor cat. The dishes are on the kneading-trough. My brother plays the^ oboe. Do not harness the horses now. He held a branch of holly in his^"^ hand. The hoe is in the garden. He was re- ceived with hootings by the multitude. He has some* very curious* helmets and coats-of-maiP in his collection. I inhale the cool air^^ of the morning. He lives in the hamlet. This child is very much^^ in- commoded^^ by the hiccough. Do you play the harp ? She was (the) mother of eight children. This great coat belonged to^* my gi-and- father. The merchant who has sold you this coal has deceived you. The owl sleeps^^ during the day. 1 couverte de, covered with 2 fait, made 8 craignait, feared 4 il n'y a plus, there is no more 5 se tenait, stood 6 voit, sees 7 vu, seen 8 hordered with, hordie de 9 to "pl&y an. instrmnent, jouer d'un instrument 10 in his, d Za 11 cool air, airfrais 12 very mucli, tre$ 13 incommoded, incommode 14 belonged to, ^ait a 15 sleeps, dort _» Frev^it Graimnar. 138 Questions on Grammar. 1. How are the articles the and some translated before a noun beginning with a mute hi 2. How are the articles the and some translated before a noun beginning with an aspirated h? 3. How is the demonstrative adjective this translated before a singular masculine noun beginning with a mute hi 4. How is the demonstrative adjective this translated before a singular masculine noun beginning with an aspirated h ? 5. How are the possessive adjectives m?/, thy, his, hers, its translated before a singular feminine noun beginning with a mute hi 6. How are the possessive adjectives my, thy, his, hers, its translated before a singular feminine noun beginning with an aspirated hi 7. How will you write ^e, me, te, se, ne, que, «fec. before a mute hi Conversation. Where does this man live ? He lives in the hamlet which you see on the top of the hill. Where did you meet him ? I met him at the market-hall. Where did he put his clothes? He put them under the shed. Tell him to bring the harness. He is gone to fetch the harrow. Do you hear your neighbour's hack ? it has been neighing for some minutes. The flies torment it very probably. Where is the owl which we heard last night ? I think it is on the beech-tree which is on the other side of the river. What bird is that? It is a heron. Where did you shoot it? On the banks of the pond which is between the hedge and the thicket. Why has the dog been howling all the morning? I do not know ; it is very quarrel- Oh. demeure cet homme? II demeure dans le hameau que vous voyez sur le haut de la coUine. Oil I'avez-vous rencontr^ ? Je I'ai rencontre k la halle. Oil a-t-il mis ses (*)hardes? II les a mises sous le hangar, Dites-lui d'apporter les hamais. II est alle chercher la herse. Entendez- vous ] a haridelle de votre voisin ? elle hennit depuis quel- ques minutes. Les mouches la harassent trfes probablement . Oil est le hibou que nous avons entendu la nuit demiere ? Je pense qu'il est sur le hetre qui est de I'autre c6te de la riviere. Quel oiseau est-ce? C'est un heron. Oil I'avez-vous tu^ ? Sur les bords de I'etang qui est entre la haie et le hallier. Pourquoi le chien a-t-il toute la matinee? hurW Je ne snis pas; gneux. il est tr^ har- (*) The student will remember that no linking takes place before an apirated k. 139 Reading Exercise No. 30. XJn marchand, tres riche mais tres avare, avait un fils qui etait, comme cela arrive tres souvent en pareil cas,l d'une extreme prodigalite. Envoye par son pere dans une ville d'nniver8ite,2 au lien de consacrer^ son temps a I'etude, il le passait* en plaisirs et en orgies, et il eut bientot con- tracte des dettes considerables. Apres avoir pourvu^ pen- dan t^ quelque temps a ses depenses, non sans accompagner chaque envoi^ d'argent d'8 une severe reprimande, le mar- chand declaraa son fils que dorenavant il ne devait^ plus^o compterli sur lui pour payer ses dettes : il lui ordonnait en meme temps de revenir^2 au foyer paterneU^. En efi'et^* I'enfant prodigue se presenta le jour suivant^S : mais il n'etait pas seul, il etait accompagne de^^ deux hommes qui s'annoncerent comme etant envoyes par un creancier pour conduirei7 le jeune homme a la prison pour dettes. lis avaient espere, disaient-ilsis, que son pere se laisserait flechirl9 encore une fois20 et qu'ils ne seraient pas obliges d'executer I'ordre qu'ils avaient regu. Le marchand, vou- lant2l eviter le scandale, et se disant22 que son fils n'aurait plus I'occasion de faire de depenses a ravenir23, puisqu'il demeurerait avec lui et I'aiderait dans ses affaires, paya la somme qu'on lui24 reclamait. Mais, helasi son fils etant sorti25 de la maison deux heures apres sous un pretexte quelconque ne revint26 pas : les deux recors27 etaient ses complices, et I'argent qui aurait dti28 rehabiliter le dissipa- teur, ne servit qu'a29 faciliter de nouveaux desordres. 1 en pareil cos, in such a case, 2 ville cCuniversiU, university town, 3 consacrer, devoting, Apassait, spent, 6 pourvu ... d, pro- vided ... for, Q pendant, for, 7 envoi, remittance, 8 d\ with, ^de- rat^ ought, 10 ne ... plus, no ..more, 11 compter, tqIj, lirevenir, to come back, IB foyer paternel, father's home, li en effet, indeed, 15 suivant, following, 16 de, by, 17 conduire, to conduct, 18 di- saient-ils, they said, 19 se laisserait flechir, would allow himself to be softened, 20 encore unefois, once again, 21 voulant, wishing, 22 se disant, saying to himself, 23 d Vavenir^ in the future, 24 lui, from him, 25 itant sorti, having gone out, 26 revint, came back, 27 recors, bailiff's assistants, 28 aurait dH, ought to have, 29 ne servit que^ only served. 140 TWENTY DIALOGUES on sul:)jects of everyday life. (Vingt dialogues sur des sujets de la vie joumalih't,) INDEX. (Table des mati^res.) k meeting 141 Une rencontre. A'bout the way, or road 142 Au sujet du chemin. Visit 143 Visite. Railway Journey 144 Voyage en chemin de fer. do. do. 145 do. do. Sea Journey 146 Traversee. At a Town 147 Dans une ville. Letting Apartments 148 Location d'appartements With a servant 149 Avec un domestique. Meals 150 Repas. To write a letter 151 Pour ecrire une lettre. At a money changer's 152 Chez un changeur. • Buying 153 Achats. Carriages 154 Voitures. At table 155 A table. A walk 156 Une promenade. With a doctor 157 Avec un docteur. Paris Museums 158 Musees de Paris. The Streets of Pane 159 Les mes de Paris. How to progress in French 160 Comment faire des progres ei. Fran^ais. 141 A Meeting". Good morning, Mr. X..., how do you do ? Quite well, thank you ; how are you? Not very well, I had a bad cold last week and have not yet quite recovered from it. I am very sorry to hear that, but hope it will have no serious consequences. Is your family in good health? I have not seen any of them since the beginning of the week, as they have gone to the seaside. Shall you not go and spend a few days with them ? I should like it very much ; but I am very busy. Did you see our friend, Mr. White the day before yesterday ? Yes ; I had an appointment with him, and saw him in the after- noon. Is it true that he is not very suc- cessful in business ? I cannot tell you precisely : but I think he has been rather un- fortunate lately in his trans- actions. Did you buy anything at the auc- tion yesterday ? Yes, I bought several pieces of furniture, two oil-paintings and a few bottles of old port- wine. "Were many buyers there? Not very many : the weather was rather bad, and I suppose that prevented many people from coming. Are you going to the Italian Opera to-night ? No ; I do not understand a word of Italian, and besides the priofi« are rather too high for me. Where are you going ? I must be at .my office by two o'clock, and have just time to catch the train. Good bye ! Una Rencontre. Bonjour, Monsieur X..., comment vous portez-vous? Tres bien, merci ; comment allez- vous? Pas tres bien ; j'ai eu un mauvais rhume la semaine derni^re, et je m'en suis pas encore tout-k- fait remis. Je suis trfes fache d'apprendre cela; mais j'espere qu'il n'aura pas de sinenses consequences. Yotf^d famille est-elle en bonne sant^? Je n'ai vu aucun d'entre eux de- puis le commencement de la semaine, vu qu'ils sont alles aux bains de mer. Irez-vous passer quelques jours avec eux? Je le voudrais bien ; mais jo suis tres occupe. Avez-vous vu notre ami, Mr. White avant-hier ? Oui; j'avais un rendez-vous avec lui, et je I'ai vu dans I'apr^s- midi. Est-il vrai qu'il ne r^ussisse pas dans les affaires? Je ne peux pas vous le dire exacte- ment ; mais je crois qu'il a etc un peu malheureux derniere- ment dans ses transactions. Avez-vous achete quelque chose hier aux encheres ? Oui ; j'ai achete quelques meubles, deux tableaux a I'huile et quel- ques bouteilles de vieux vin de Porto. Y avait-il beaucoup d'acheteurs ? Pas b?aucoup : le temps etait un peu mauvais et je suppose que cela a empech6 beaucoup de monde de venir. AUez-vous ce soir aux Italiens? Non ; je ne comprends pas un mot d'ltalien ; et de plus les prix sont un peu trop eleves pour moi. Ou allez-vous? Je dois etre k mon bureau vers deux lieures et j'ai juste le temps de prendre le train. Adieu.. 142 About the way, or road. Will you kindly tell me which is the shortest way to the Ex- change ? Witli much pleasure. Go straight on until you arrive at the church whicli you see down there ; then take the first street on the right and the second on the left. Thank you. How long will it take me to go there ? About twenty minutes, if you do not stop on the way. Can you tell me if I shall find a good restaurant before arriving at the Exchange? You will find some in this street and many others near the Ex- change; but the latter are rather expensive and I should advise you to go to one in this street, where you will be sure to find anything you require. Is there any foreign money changer in the neighbourhood ? There is one opposite the church ; but I should advise you to go to the goldsmith whose shop is just at the corner of the street which leads to the Exchange. Is there any tramcar going in that direction? There is one just coming ; but it will not take you further than the church. oes it stop there? No ; but, you would arrive at the river if you remained in it as far as it goes. Can you direct me to the nearest post-office? You will find it on the right, al>out two hundred paces from here. Is the telegraph office at the same place ? No ; you will find it on the other side, just opposite the fountain. I thank you very much for your kindness, Sir. Do not mention it. Au sujet du chemin. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de me dire quel est le plus court chemin pour aller k la Bourse ? Avec beaucoup de plaisir. AUez tout droit jusqu'4 ce que vous arriviez h I'eglise que vous voyez la-bas ; prenez alors la premiere rue h droite et la seconde k gauche. Je vous remercie. Combien de temps me faudra-t-il pour y aller? Environ vingt minutes, si vous ne vous arretez pas en route. Pouvez-vous me dire si je trouverai un bon restaurant avant d'ar- river k la Bourse ? Vous en trou verezquelques uns dans cette rue et beaucoup d'autres pres de la Bourse ; mais ces der- niers sont un pen chers, et je vous conseillerais d'aller dansun de ceux de cette rue, ou vous seriez sur de trouver tout oe dont vous avez besoin Y a-t-il un chano-piir dans le voisinage ? II y en a un en face de I'eglise ; mais je vous conseillerais (Taller chez I'orfevre dont le magasin est juste au coin de la rue qui conduit k la Bourse. Y a-t-il un tramway qui aille dans cette direction ? En voilh, justement un qui vient maintenant; mais ilne vous con- duira pas ])lus loin que I'eglise. S'arrete-t-illk? Non ; mais vous arriveriez k la riviere, si vous y restiez aussi longtemps qu'il marche. Pouvez-vous m'indiquer le bureau de poste le plus prochain ? Vous le trouverez sur la droite, k environ deux cents pas d'ici. Le bureau du telegi'aphe est-il au mSme endroit? Non ; vous le trouverez de I'autre cote, juste vis-a-vis de la fon- taine. Monsieur, je vous remercie beau- couj) de votre obligeance. Ne parlez pas de cela. 143 Visit. Good morning, Madam; how do and how is Mrs. R you do? Very well, sir ; X...? Thank you very much, madam : Mrs X. is quite well, and she would certainly have accom- panied me if her sister had not come from Paris to pay her a short visit, I am very sorry she did not ac- company you: I should have been very pleased to make Miss S...'s acquaintance. Miss S... was very tired with her journey ; but she will not leave London without coming to see you. Tell her how pleased I shall be to see her: I am generally at home every day after 4 o'clock except Thursdays, and never go out in the evening. Have you been in the country with your family ? Yes, madam ; we only returned a fortnight ago. How was the weather while you were there ? We were rather fortunate ; during the three weeks we remained at X... the weather was extremely fine. Have you heard from your brother lately? Yes, I had a letter from him yes- terday. Have you seen the last number of the •* Monde lUustre?" Yes, Madam ; I am a subscriber to that illustrated paper. Is there anything specially inter- esting in this number? There are very good sketches from the correspondent at the seat of war. Are you going already ? I am very sorry I cannot stay any longer, but must meet Mr. Z... at half past four. Visite. Bonjour, Madame ; comment vous portez-vous ? Tres bien, Monsieur ; et comment va Madame X... ? Je vous remercie beaucoup, Ma- dame : Madame X. va tres bien et elle m'aurait certainement accompagne, si sa soeur n'etait pas venue de Paris pour lui faire une courte visite. Jo suis tres fachee qu'elle ne vous ait pas accompagne : j'aurais ete tres heureuse de faire la con- naissance de Mademoiselle S.... Mademoiselle S... etait tres fati- guee de son voyage ; mais elle ne quittera pas Londres sans venir vous voir. Dites-lui combien je serai heureuse de la voir : je suis generalement chez moi tons les jours aprfes quatre heures, excepte les Jeudis, et je ne sors jamais dans la soiree. Avez-vous ete k la campagne avec votre famille ? Oui, madame ; nous ne sommes revenus qu'il y a quinze jours. Quel temps faisait-il pendant que vous y etiez ? Nous avons ete vraiment heureux : pendant les trois semaines que nous sommes restes k X... le temps a ete extremement beau. Avez-vous re9u demi^rement des nouvelles de votre frere? Oui, j'ai regu hier une lettre de lui. Avez-vous vu le dernier numero du Monde Hlustr^ ? Oui, madame ; je suis abonne a ce journal illustre. Y a-t-il quelque chose de sp(?ciale- ment interessant dans ce n umero? II y a de tres bons croquis du cor- respondant du theatre de la guerre. Vous en allez-vous dejk? Je regrette beaucoup de ne pas pouvoir rester plus longtemps mais je dois me rencontrer k quatre heures et demie a^-ecMr. Z . 144: Railway Journey. Two tickets to Paris, please. What class? Second class. Would you not like to liave first class tickets for the sea journey. Wliat would be the difference in the price ? Two shillings. When does the train leave? At 10 o'clock. How long will it take us to go to Dover? About two- hours. Where shall I have my luggage registered ? Next door. Is there any smoking carriage in the train ? Yes, sir; there is also a Pulman car which any passenger can enter by paying a small addit- ional sum. Is tliere any special carriage for ladies? No ; it is not the custom in this country. Is there any great difference be- tween single and return tickets ? Tliere is generally a difference of a quarter on the total amount. Please weigh my luggage ; handle the trunks carefully. Take your seats, gentlemen. Please allow my friends to remain on the platform until the train starts. Your tickets, gentlemen. Here they are. You are in the wrong train, sir. Where is my train, then? I was told to enter this carriage. You very probably misunderstood the guard ; you will have to go to the carriages which are op- posite the clock : this train only goes to Have I time to go and have some refreshments? You have just five minutes. Voyage en chemin do far. Deux billets pour Paris, s'il v. pi. Quelle classe? Deuxieme classe. Ne voudriez-vous pas avoir des billets de premiere classe pour la traversee ? Quelle serait la difference de prix? Deux shellings. Quand part le train? A dix heures. Combien de temps nous faut-il pour aller k Douvres ? Environ deux heures. Oil dois-je faire enregistrer mea bagages? A la porte d'k c8te. Y a-t-il dans le train une voiture pour les fumeurs ? Oui, monsieur; il y a aussi une voiture Pulman ou pent entrer chaque voyageur, en pay ant un petit supplement. Y a-t-il des wagons speciaux pour les Dames? Non ; ce n'est pas I'habitude dans ce pays-ci. Y a-t-il une grande difference entre le prix des billets simples et celui des billets d'aller et retour? II y a generalement une difference d'un quart de la somme totale. Veuillez i>eser mes bagages: maniea soigneusement les malles. Iln voiture, messieurs. "Veuillez permettre k mes amis de Tester eur le quai jusqu'k ce que le train parte. Vos billets, messieurs. Les voici. ]\Ionsieur, vous Stes dans le mau- vais train. Oil done est mon train : on m'a dit d'entrer dans cette voiture. Vous avez probablement mal com- pris le chef de train ; vous auroz a aller jusqu'aux voitures qui sent en face de I'horloge; ce train-ci ne va qu'k Ai-je le temps d'aller prendre quel- que rafraichissements ? Vous avez juste cinq minutes. 146 Railway Journey (concluded). Do you not think the train does not run very fast ? They are just repairing this part of the road and they must move over it very cautiously. "What is the name of the village we just saw on our right ? I do not know ; it is the first time I have travelled this way. Will you kindly shut the window; I have a bad cold and feel rather afraid of the di-aught Would you prefer to sit with your back towards the engine ? I will not trespass on your kind- ness. It makes no difference to me. When does the train arrive at our destination ? At five minutes past four. Your tickets, gentleman. Have we arrived? You will be at Paris in two min- utes, but the tickets are always collected before reaching the station. Where have I to go to get my luggage? Pass this way and you will see the custom officers standing at the entrance of the room where your luggage will be searched and then delivered to you. Shall we have to wait a long time? I do not think so : about a quarter of an hour or twenty minutes. Do you want me to open this trunk? I have nothing in it but clothes. We are bound to examine every trunk. I have only a pound of tobacco for personal use. You can close your portmanteau. Voyage en chemin de fer (fin). Ne eroyez-vous pas que le train ne marche pas tr6s rapidement. lis sont en train de reparer cette paitie de la voie, et on doit en cet endroit-ci marcher avec beaucoup de precautions. Quel est le nom du village que nou? venons de voir sur notre droite ? Je ne sais pas ; c'est la premiere fois que je voyage par cette route. Voudriez-vous avoir la bonte de fermer la portiere ; j'ai un mau- vais rhume et je crains beaucoup les courants d'air. Prefereriez-vous vous asseoir le doi tourne h. la machine? Je n'abuserai pas it^ votre bont6. Cela m'est indifferent. Quand le train arrive-t-il k notre destination ? A quatre heures cinq minutes. Vos billets, messieurs. Sommes-nous arrives? Vous serez \ Paris dans deux minutes, mais on prend toujours les billets avant d!arriver k la gare. Oil dois-je aller pour avoir mes bagages t Passez par ici et vous verrez lea douaniers debout k I'entree de la salle ou vos bagages seront visites et ensuite vous seront remis. Aurons-nouslongtemps k attendre? Je ne pense pas : environ un quart d'heure ou vingt minutes. Youlez-vous que j'ouvre cette malle ; je n'y ai que des effets. Nous sommes forces de visiter chaque malle. Je n'ai qu'une livre de tabac pour mon usage personnel. Yous pouvez fermer votre porte- manieau. Sea Journey. Which is the steamer for Dieppe ? The one you see there alongside the quay. \VTicn will she start? At high water — at two thirty five The steamer appears to me to be very small. Oh, no ; she is a very good size : she has been plying between Newhaven and Dieppe the last two years, and although the sea is often rough, has neve^- re- quired any important repairs. Will you show me the way to the second class cabins? Come this way, sir. Steward, I am looking for a berth and cannot find any disengaged. Here is an unoccupied berth, sir ; do you wish to take anything ? Yes, please ; bring me some tea. The sea is now very calm : would you not like to go on deck? there are few passengers there, and the air is cool and bracing. What is the light-house we see there, on the horizon ? It is the light-house at the en- trance of the harbour. What is that boat, which is coming to meet us? I believe it is a pilot. I think we are stopping. Yes, we must wait until the tide will allow us to enter the port. Is it not possible to hire a boat to take us ashore ? The sea is rather rough this morn- ing: which I suppose is the reason I do not see any boats. What is the signal they are just hoisting at the end of the pier? The signal that there is enough water now to enter the harbour. 146 I jR Traversee. Quel est le bateau h, vapeur de Dieppe ? C'est celui que vous voyez la le long du quai. Quand partira-t-il? A la maree haute, h. deux heures trente-cinq. Le bateau h, vapeur me parait tres petit. Oh, non ; il est de bonne grandeur il y a deux ans qu'il fait le ser- vice entre Newhaven et Dieppe et quoique la mer soit souvent mauvaise, il n'a jamais eu be- soin d'importantes reparations. Voudriez-vous me montrer le che- min pour aller aux cabines de deuxieme classe? Venez par ici, Monsieur. Maitre d'hdtel, je cherche une place et je n'en puis trouver de vacante. Voici une place vacante. Monsieur; desirez-vous prendre quelque- chose? Oui, s'il vous plait ; apportez-moi du the. La mer est tr^s calme maintenant : n'aimeriez-vous pas k aller sur le pont, il y a Ik pen de passagers et I'air est frais et vif. Qu'est-ce que c'est que le phare que nous voyons Ik-bas a I'horizon? C'est le phare de I'entree du port. Qu'est-ce que c'est que le bateau qui vient au devant de nous ? Je crois que c'est un pilote. Je crois que nous nous arretons. Oui, nous devons attendre que la marco nous permette d'entrer dans le port. N'est il pas possible de louer un bateau pour aller k terre ? La mer est un pen houleuse, ce matin ; c'est ce qui fait, je sup- pose, quejenevois aucun bateau. Quel est le signal qu'on hisse k I'extremitj^ de la jetee? C'est le signal (|u'il y a assez d'eau pour entrer dans le port. 147 vt- At a Town. Is there any omnibus which will take me to the Continental Hotel? Any omnibus will take you there. What are the edifices worthy of interest on account of their his- torical connections ? You ought to visit the Cathedral, the Town Hall, the Law courts, the bridges, and the old gates, the only remains of the ramparts of the city. Is the cathedral a very ancient building? It is one of the oldest specimens of gothic architecture in our country. Is an industrial town? It is renowned for its cotton mills and also for its cloth manufac- tories. What is the population of the city? There were about two hundred and fifty three thousand inhabi- tants at the last census which took place at the end of last year. Is there anything to be seen in the surrounding country ? There are the ruins of an old ab- bey, the modern castle of the Earl of , and a beautiful forest of oaks and beech-trees. Will you be able to come with me to-morrow. Yes ; with much pleasure. What is the width of the river? About two hundred yards. Is the current very rapid? Not very. What is the little chapel which I see there, on the top of the hill? It is the cemetery chapel. Are there any remarkable monu- ments in it ? Hardly any : it was only built ten years ago. Dans une ville. Y a-t-il un omnibus qui me con- duise a rH6tel Continental ? N'importe quel omnibus vous y conduira. Quels sont les edifices qui sont dignes d'interet, k cause des sou- venirs historiques qui s'y rat* tachent ? Vous devriez visiter la cathedrale, rh6tel de ville, le palais de justice, les pouts, et les vieilles portes, seuls vestiges des rem- parts de la cite. La cathedrale est-elle un Edifice tres ancien? C'est un des plus vieux specimens d'architecture gothique de notre pays. Est-ce que est une ville in- dustrielle ? EUeestrenommee pour ses filatures de coton et aussi pour ses manu- factures de drap. Quelle est la population de cette ville? II y avait environ deux cent- cinquante-trois mille habitants an dernier recensement qui a eu lieu a la fin de I'annee dernifere. Y a-t-il quelque chose a voir dans le pays environnant? II y a les mines d'une vieille abbaye, le chateau moderne du comte de , et une belle foret de de chenes et de hetres. Pourrez-vous venir avec moi de- main? Oui ; avec beaucoup de plaisir. Quelle est la largeur de la riviere? Environ deux cents yards. Le courant est-il tres-rapide ? Non, il ne Test pas. Quelle est la petite chapelle que je vols \k, sur le sommet de ia colline ? C'est la chapelle du cimetifere. Y a-t-il quelques remarquables monuments ? II n'y en a pour ainsi dire pas: iln'y a que dix ans qu'elle est b^tie. 148 t Letting Apartments. I should like to have a suite of rooms composed of a drawing- room, a dining room, three bed- rooms, a kitchen, and two rooms for servants. What floor would suit you best ? The first or second floor. "We have no apartments vacant on either of these floors, but we have just what you want on the third story. I am afraid it would be too high. I do not think it would incon- venience you at all, as there is a lift in the house. Are there any stables belonging to the mansion ? No, sir ; but the mews are situated within two minutes walk, and you can see them very well from the back windows of your apart- ment. Is there any post and telegraph ofiice in the street? Yes, sir ; there is a post office at the end of the street, and a letter box at the next house. What is the rent which was paid by the preceding occupier ? One hundred and twenty pounds. Is that sum inclusive of water and gas ? No, sir; that you have to pay separately. Are the apartments to be let by the month or year ? They have always been let by the month, but the terms of a new arrangement can be submitted to the landlord. Tien could I see him? the course of next week ; leave me your address, I will let you know. am quite willing to take the rooms, on condition I can have them by the year : I do not like removing every month. Location d'apparte- ments. Je voudrais avoir un appartement compose d'un salon, d'une salle a manger, de trois chambres k coucher, d'une cuisine et de deux chambres de domestiques. Quel est I'etage qui vous convien- drait le mieux ? Le premier ou le second etage. Nous n'avons d'appartements va- cants h, aucun de ces etages, mais nous avons juste ce que vous desirez au troisieme etage. Je crains que cela ne soit trop haut. Je ne pense pas que cela vous gene du tout, vu qu'il y a un ascen- seur dans la maison. Y a-t-il des ecuries qui appartien- nent k la maison ? Non, monsieur; mais les ecuries sont situees k deux minutes de marche, et vous pouvez les voir des fenetres de derriere de votre appartement. Y a-t-il un bureau de poste et de telegraphe dans la rue ? Oui, monsieur ; il y a un bureau de poste au bout de la rue et une boite aux lettres a la maison voisine. Quel est le loyer que payait le lo- cataire precedent? Cent-vingt livres sterling. Cette somme comprend elle I'eau et le gaz ? Non, monsieur; vous avez h, les payer separement. Ces appartements peuvent-ils etre loues au mois ou h. I'annee? lis ont toujours ete loues au mois, mais les conditions d'un nouvel arrangement peuvent etre sou- mises au proprietaire. Quand pourrais-je le voir? Dans le courant de la semaine prochaine ; laissez-moi votre adresse, je vous le ferai savoir. Je suis tout dispose h. prendre les chambres, h la condition que j» pnisse les avoir k I'ann^e; jo n'aime pas k domenager chaque mois. 149 n With a Servant. What time do you get up every morning ? I generally rise between seven and half past. "Will you then call me every morning as soon as you are dressed ? Yes, sir ; you may rely upon me, and should anything happen to prevent me, I shall not forget to tell another servant to knock at your door at the proper time. Take my boots, please, and bring them back into my room as soon as they are cleaned. The left boot is unsewed : shall I take it to the shoemaker to have it repaired? Yes ; but tell him that I want it this evening. There are two letters for you, sir. When did the postman bringthem? He brought them just now. I found no water on my toilet table, last night ; will you fetch me some, that I may dress my- self; it is getting late. Do you want anything else? Yes; I should like to have two clean towels : do not forget to change them twice a week. Somebody brought this note for you and waits for an answer. Say that I am engaged and shall call this afternoon. Mr. X asks if you can receive him. Show him in. Shall you want your supper this evening ? Yes ; put it on my table, but do not wait for me ; it is quite pos- sible that I may be rather late, I and I do not wish to disturb anybody in the house. Here is a key which the landlord I asked me to give you, in order i that you may come in at any time you lik«. Aveo un Domestique. A. quelle heure vous levez-vous les matins? Je me leve g^n^ralement entre sept heures et sept heures et demie. Youlez-vous alors m'appeler tons les matins, aussi-t6t que vous serez habille? Oui, mons. ; vous pouvez compter sur moi ; et s'il arrivait quelque chose qui m'en empechat, je n'oublierais pas de dire k un autre domestique de frapper k votre porte k I'heure convenable. Prenez mesbottines, s'il vous plait, etrapportezles dans ma chambre aussitotqu'ellesserontnettoyecs. La bottine gauche est decousue; dois-je la porter au cordonnier pour qu'il la repare ? Oui; mais dites-lui que j'en ai besoin ce soir. Yoici deux lettres pour vous, mon- sieur. Quandlefacteurlesa-t-ilapportees? II vient de les apporter. Je n'ai pas trouve d'eau sur ma table de toilette, hier soir ; vou- lez-vous aller m'en chercher, que je m'habille ; il se fait tard. Avez-vous besoin de quelque autre chose 1 Oui ; je voudrais avoir deux essuie- mains propres ; n'oubliez pas de les changer deux foisparsemaine. Quelqu'un a apporte cette lettre pour vous et attend une reponse. Dites que je suis occupe et qu§ je passerai cette apres-midi. M. X demande si vous pou- vez le recevoir. Faites le entrer. Aurez-vous besoin de votre souper ce soir? Oui; mettez-le sur ma table, mais ne m'attendez pas ; il est pos- sible que je rentre un pen tard et je ne veux deranger personne dans la maison. Yoici une clef que le propri^taire m'a charge de vous donner, afin que vous puissiez rentrer k I'heure qui vous conviendxa. 160 Meals. What do you wish to have for your breakfast ? Two boiled eggs, ratherunderdone, and a rasher of bacon. Would you like tea, coffee, or cocoa? Give me some tea, with two pieces of toasted bread. What will you have for your lunch? Some cold roast beef and salad, some cheese, and a bottle of beer. We have some very nice cold roast chicken, and a leg of mutton; would you not like some in- stead of roast beef? I am afraid it is rather overdone for you. Well, let me have some chicken. Will you dine with us this even- ing? we expect Mrs. X and her two daughters, and Mr. S 's cousins. I am not sure I shall be able to come, but will do my best to be here. At what time do you dine? At seven o'clock. What shall we have for dinner. Ox tail soup, salmon, a roasted turkey with ham, and a haunch of venison, asparagus and po- tatoes. Do not forget to have some supper ready for me. Will you have cold meat? Yes; a small piece of cold veal will do very well, with some Roquefort cheese and a glass of claret. Will you kindly ask the landlady if she would mind my buying everything I require ; of course she would charge me for cooking and attendance. I will ask madam ; but I know she docs not much like that way Qf managing. Repas. Que d^sirez-vous avoir pour votre dejeuner? Deux oeufs k la coque, pen cuits, et une tranche de lard. Voulez-vous du the, du cafe ou du cacao ? Donnez-moi du the, avec deux morceaux de pain grille. Que voulez-vous pour votre de- jeuner k la fourchette ? Du bcBuf roti froid et de la salade, du fromage et une bouteille de biere. Nous avons de trfes bon poulet r6ti froid, et un gigot de mou- ton; en voudriez-vous au lieu de boeuf r6ti ? Je crains qu'il ne soit trop cuit pour vous. Eh bien! faites-moi donner du poulet. Dinerez-vous avec nous ce soir? nous attendons madame X et ses deux fiUes, et les cousins deMr. S Je ne suis pas silr que je puisse venir, niais je ferai de mon micux pour etre ici. A quelle heure dinez-vous ? A sept heures. Qu'aurons nous pour diner? De la soupe k la queue de boeuf, du saumon, un dindon r8ti avec du jambon et un gigot de venaison, des asperges et des pommes-de- terre. N'oubliez pas de me preparer k souper. Voulez-vous de la viande froide? Oui; un petit morceau de veau froid fera tres bien mon affaire, avec du fromage de Roquefort et un verre de Bordeaux. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de de- mander k la proprietaire si cela lui ferait quelque chose que j'achetasse tout ce qu'il me faut ; naturellement elle me ferait payer la cuisine et le service. Je demanderai k madame ; mais je aais qu'elle n'aime pas beaucoup cette manifere de faire. 161 /=^ To write a Letter. Be good enougli to bring me some note paper, envelopes, ink, pens and sealing wax. Here they are, sir, will you re- quire any stamps ? I shall want a shilling's worth of halfpenny stamps to send some circular letters to my friends on the Continent ; twelve penny ones, and four two pence half- penny ones, as I must write to my brothers in France. Are some of your letters ready? if so, I can take them to the post office when I go out. When does the mail start? The letters must be posted before half past five if you want to for- ward them by the evening mail. I shall feel much obliged if you will post these two letters for France. I do not think I shall have time to finish the other three. Do you not think that this letter is too heavy? I do not think so ; but they will weigh it for you at the post office, if you ask them. Do not forget to bring me some post cards and two envelopes for registered letters. Shall I procure the Post-office order for you, which you men- tioned last night? Yes, please. • What amount do you intend to send? Two hundred and thirty-two francs, twenty-five centimes : I am just going out and shall get the money at my banker's. Do not forget that no Post-office orders are issued after five o'clock. I shall certainly be back before that time. Pour ecrire une Lettre. Ayez la bonte de m'apporter du papier k lettre, des enveloppes, de I'encre, des plumes et de la cire k cacheter. Voici, monsieur ; aurez-vous besoin de timbres-poste ? J'aurai besoin d'un shelling de timbres de cinq centimes pour envoyer des lettres de faire-part kraes amis du Continent; de douze timbres de dix centimes, et de quatre timbres de vingt- cinq centimes, vu qu'il faut que j'ecrive en France a mes fr^res. Quelques unes de vos lettres sont elles pretes? s'il en est ainsi, je pourrai les porter h la poste, quand je sortirai. Quand part le courrier? Les lettres doivent etre mises k la poste avant cinq heures et demie si vous voulez les envoyer par le QDurrier du soir. Je vous serai tres oblige de bien vouloirmettrek la poste ces deux lettres pour France. Je ne pense Cque j'aie le temps de finir trois autres. Ne pensez-vous pas que cette lettre soit trop lourde ? Je ne pense pas ; mais on vous la pfesera au bureau de poste si vous le demandez. N'oubliez pas de m'apporter des cartes postales et deux enve- loppes pour lettres chargees. Vous prondrai-je le mandat sur la Eoste dont vous faisiez mention ier soir? Oui, s'il vous plait. Quelle somme avez-vousl'intention d'envoyer? Deux cent-trente-deux francs, vingt-cinq centimes: je vais sortir et j'irai chercher I'argent chez mon banquier. N'oubliez pas qu'on ne d^livre pas de mandats sur la poste apr^s cinq heures. Je serai certainement de retour avant oette heure. 162 R At a Money Changer's. Will you kindly change this hun- dred franc note and these twenty franc pieces for me ? Would you like to have gold or notes ? I will take a five-pound note, four pounds in gold and the rest in silver and copper. What is the exchange for twenty franc pieces ? Fifteen shillings and eight pence. I expected to lose only three pence on every piece? I think, on the contrary, I am very reasonable in charging you four pence only. Can you discount this draft ? I am sorry I cannot do that for you; we only discount drafts when the drawer and the bearer are personally known to as. Can you direct me to any bank which would discount it? I am afraid you will find the same difficulty everywhere, unless you are introduced by a friend. Where could I sell these stocks? I will take them of you at market prices. Can you tell me how to invest a small capital? I would advise you to buy Govern- ment bonds or some shares in our great Railway Companies, The interest is not very high, but you have not the slightest risk to run. I am leaving town for a month : could I deposit these stocks with you? We will certainly take them to oblige you; but should prefer your depositing them with your banker. Will you advance me some money on these deeds ? No, sir ; we are money changers, but never lend any money. Chez un Changeur. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de me changer ce billet de cent francs et ces pieces de vingt francs ? Voulez-vous avoir de I'or ou des billets de banque ? Je prendrai un billet de banque de cinq livres, quatre livres en or, et le reste en argent et en billon. Quel est le change pour les pieces de vingt francs? Quinze shellings et huit pence. Je ne pensais perdre que trois pence sur chaque pi^ce? Je crois au contraire que je suis tres raisonnable en ne vous prenant que quatre pence. Pouvez-vous escompter cette traite? Je suis fache de ne pouvoir faire cela pour vous : nous n'escomp- tons de traites que quand le tireur et le 'y)yteur nous sont connus person^ellement. Pourriez-vous m'indiquer uno ban- que qui I'escompterait? J'ai peur que vous ne trouviez par- tout la meme difficulte ; a moins que vous ne soyez presente par un ami. Ou pourrais-je vendre cesvaleurs? Je vous les prendrai aux prix du cours. Pourriez-vous me dire comment placer un petit capital ? Je vous conseillerais d'acheter des fonds sur I'etat ou quelques ac- tions de nos grandes compagnies dechcmins defer. L'interetn'est pas tres eleve, mais vous n'avez pas le moindre risque k courir. Je quitte la ville pour un mois : pourrais-je dep^ rvr ces valeura chez vous? Nous les prendrons certainement pour vous obliger; mais nous prefererions que vous les de- posassiez chez votre banquier. Voudriez-vous m'avancer de I'ar- gent sur ces titres? Non, monsieur; nous sommes changeurs, mais nous ne pretons jamais d'argent. 153 Buying. How do you sell this ? At the price you see marked ; all our goods have the prices marked in plain figures. Is that the lowest price ! Yes, we fix our prices as low as possible, and cannot reduce them. Give me five yards of this ? Do you think it will be enough ? I am afraid you will have some trouble in procuring the same material in a few weeks time. I am not satisfied with the cloth you sold me the other day. I had a good mind to return it to you. We are very sorry you did not do so, as we always do our best to satisfy all our customers. Have you still any of the black velvet which you sold to my friend two days ago ? I think so ; yes, > ' re it is ; how much will you take: you can have it a little cheaper than Mrs if you take the whole, as it is a remnant. I will take it then : whatever may be the fashion, velvet is always rich and elegant. Shall I show you anything else? I am just considering if I am in want of anything more. "We have very nice sunshades which we could sell you at ex- ceptionally low prices. The season is rather advanced : I should prefer to have a cheap silk umbrella. This is a very good article : I do not think you could buy it cheaper anywhere else. I will have this one. Please send it to my address, 65, Bess- borough Street. Achats. -^ Combien vendez-vous ceci? Au prlx que vous voyez marqu6 ; toutes nos marchandises portent leur prix marque en chiffres connus. Est-ce le plus has prix ? Oui, nous faisons nos prix aussi has que possible, et nous ne pouvons les reduire. Donnez-moi cinq yards de ceci, Pensez-vous que ce soit assez ; je Grains que vous n'ayez de la peine k vous procurer la meme etoflfe dans quelques semaines. Je ne suis pas contente du drap que vous m'avez vendu I'autre j our. J'avais bien envie de vous le renvoyer. Nous sommes tr^s faches que vous ne I'ayez pas fait, vu que nous faisons toujours de notre mieux pour satisfaire tons nos clients. Avez-vous encore du velours noir qus vous avez vendu k mon amie il y a deux jours? Je pense que oui ; le voici ; com- bien en prendrez-vous ? vous pouvez I'avoir h, un pen meilleur march^ que madame , si vous prenez le tout, vu que c'est un coupon. Je le prendrai done: quelle que soit la mode, le velours est tou- jours riche et elegant. Vous montrerai-je quelque chose d'autre ? Je me demandais justement si j'avais besoin d'autre chose. Nous avons de tres jolies ombrelles que nous pourrions vous vendre k des prix exceptionnellement has. La saison est un peu avancee : je prefererais avoir un parapluio de sole k bon marche. Voici un tres bon article : je ne peuse pas que vous puissiez I'acheter autre part meilleur marche. Je prendrai celui-ci. Veuillez me I'envoyer k mon adresse, rue de Bessborough, numero 65. J64 Carriages. Cabman, how much will you charge me to go to the Northern Rail- way station ? Two francs and fifty centimes, sir. It is too much : I will give you two francs. Very well, sir ; what train do you want to catch ? I want to leave by the express. Then we shall have no time to lose. Where does this omnibus go ? It follows the whole line of the "Boulevards." What is the fare? Three pence inside and three half pence outside. Is there any difference according to the distance ? No, it is the same fare any dis- tance- Will that omnibus take me to the Southern Railway Station? No, you will have to take a trans- fer ticket. Is there anything to pay for it? No, the conductor is obliged to give it to anybody who asks for it, without any extra charge. Where can I find a decent carriage at a reasonable charge? At the next livery stables. Are there any regular fares? Yes, you can have carriages by the drive or by the hour at very moderate charges. Are the fares the same at all times? No; they are higher from half past twelve at night till six o'clock in the morning during the summer, and seven during the winter. Is there anything to pay for the luggage. Yes; you have to pay an extra charge of twenty-five centimes for every parcel. Voitures. Cocher, combien me prendrez-voua pour aller k la gare du Nord ? Deux francs cinquante centimes, monsieur. C'est trop : je vous donnerai deux francs. Tr^s Men, monsieur; quel train voulez-vous prendre? Je veux partir par 1"* express." Alors nous n'avons pas de temps k perdre. Oil va cet omnibus ? II suit toute la ligne des Boule- vards. Quel est le tarif ? Trente centimes h, I'int^rieur et quinze centimes sur I'lmperiale. y a-t-il quelque difference, d'apr^s la distance ? Non, c'est le meme tarif pour toutes les distances. Cet omnibus me conduira-t-il k la Gare du Mndi? Non; vous aurez k prendre une correspondance. Y a-t-il quelque chose h payer pour ce billet? Non, le conducteur est oblige de le donner h tons ceux qui le de- mandent, sans aucune augmen- tation. Oh puis-je trouver une voiture convenable h, un prix raisonnable. A la premiere remise. Existe-t-il un tarif reglementaire ? Qui; vouspouvez avoir des voitures h la course ou h. I'heure k des prix tr^s moderes. Les prix sont-ils les mSmes k toute heure ? Non ; ils sont plus ^lev^s depuis minuitetdemi jusqu'asix heures du matin, pendant I'ete et sept heures pendant I'hiver. Y a-t-il quelque chose k payer pour les bagages? Qui ; vous avez k payer un su^pl^ ment de vingt-cinq centimes par colis. 165 Ar At table. Where shall I sit ? Take a chair near Mrs. X. Shall I help you to some soup? Yes, thank you. Mr. X , will you kindly pass me a piece of bread ? With the greatest pleasure: do you prefer stale or new bread I As a matter of taste I prefer new bread, but stale bread is more digestible. Will you take a slice of this beef? it is very nicely done. Give me a very small piece, please; I do not feel very hungry. Do you wish to have some gravy ? No, thank you. Have some potatoes and some haricot beans. I would rather have some cauli- flowers. Will you kindly carve this fowl ? I burnt my right hand the other day , and can hardly do anything with it. Do you wish to have some more meat? No, thank you, I have done very nicely. Shall I help you to some salad? I must tell you that it is seas- oned after the French fashion, that is to say, with olive oil and vinegar. Thank you, I shall like very much to have some, I am rather fond of it. Will you have some of this apple tart? No, thank you: I prefer some jelly. What would you like to drink ? I will take a glass of claret : beer causes me to feel sleepy, and I do not care for heavy wines. 1 think you will like this wine : we buy it directly from the grower, to be sure that it has not undergone any adulteration . A table. Oi m'asseierai-je ? Prenez une chaise pres de madamt Vous servirai-je de la soupe? Oui, merci. M. X . . . voulez-vous avoir la bonte de me passer un morceau de pain? Avec le plus grand plaisir : pr6- ferez-vous le pain rassis ou le pain frais ? Comme affaire de goM, je pr^fere le pain frais, mais le pain rassis est /plus facile k digerer. Prendrez-vous une tranche de ce bceuf ? il est tres bien cuit. Donnez m'en un tout petit mor- ceau, je vous prie: je ne me sens pas tres faim. Voulez-vous un peu de jus? Non, merci. Prenez des pommes de terre et des haricots. Je prendrais plut6t des choux- fleurs. Voulez-vous avoir la bont6 de de- couper cette volaille ? je me suis brule la main droite I'autre jour et je peux k peine m'en servir. Desirez-vous encore un peu de viande ? Non, merci ; j'ai tr^s bien dln6. Desirez-vous de la salade ? je dois vous dire qu'elle est asaisonnee k la Fran9aise, c'est-k-dire k I'huile d' olive et au vinaigre. Merci, j'en prendrai avec beaucoup de plaisir, je I'aime beaucoup. Voulez-vous un peu de cette tarte aux pommes ? Non, merci : je prefere delagelee. Que desirez-vous boire ? Je prendrai un verre de Bordeaux; la biere m'endort et je n'aime pas les vins capiteux. Je pense que vous aimerez ce vin- ci : nous I'achetons directement au proprietaire, afin d'etre sur qu'U n'a subi aucuu frelatage. 166 P^ A Walk. Will you come and take a walk with me? I have notliing to do this afternoon. Where do you intend going ? I intend going to the " Tuileries," the garden is beautiful ; flowers are now in full bloom ; the foun- tains temper the heat of the day; orange trees are covered with blossom, and the chestnut trees invite visitors to sit in their cool and agreeable shade. How late will it be when we come back? I do not know: from the "Tuil- eries" I intend crossing the Concord Square, the most mag- nificent square in the world, with its perspective of palaces, public buildings, and gardens; then walkingalongthe ' 'Champs Elysees" as far as the "Trium- phal arch of the Star. Do you not think we should do better to take an open carriage and extend our excursion as far as the Boulogne Wood and Ac- climatation Garden? No ; I feel I require some exercise and I think I shall enjoy my walk very much. Very well; I will accompany you : shall we take umbrellas? I believe it quite unnecessary ; the barometer has risen since the beginning of the week, and there is no probability of rain this afternoon. The clock has just struck nine ; let us go, if we do not want to lose tho most agreeable part of the day. Do you not feel tired, and would you not like to sit down a few minutes? I should like it very much : there is an empty bench, let us sit down. TTne promenade. Voulez-vous venir faire une pro- menade avec moi? je n'ai rien h, faire cette apres-midi. Oil avez-vous I'intention d'aller? J'ai I'intention d'aller aux Tui- leries : le jardin en est beau ; les fleurs sont maintenant en pleine fleur; les jets d'eau temperent la chaleur du jour ; les orangers sont converts de fleurs et les chataigniers invitent les visiteurs h. s'asseoir k leur ombre fraiche et agreable. Quelle heure sera-t-il quand nous reviendrons? Je ne sais pas : en quittant les Tui- leries, j'ai I'intention de tra- verser la place de la Concorde, la place la plus magnifique qu'il y ait an monde, avec sa per- spective de palais, d'edifices pu- blics et de jardins ; et alors de marcher le long de Champs Elysees, jusqu'kl'arc de triomphe de I'Etoile. Ne pensez-vous x>as que nous fe- rions mieux de prendre une voi- ture decouverte et de pousser notre excursion jusqu'au bois de Boulogue et au jardin d'accli- matation ? Non; j'ai besoin d'exercice et je Sense que je prendrai beaucoup e plaisir a ma promenade. Tres bien ; je vous accompagnerai: emporterons-nous desparapluies? Je crois que c'est tout-k-fait inu- tile; le barometre a monte de- puis le commencement de la semaine. et il n'y a aucune pro- babilite qu'il pleuve cette apres- midi. L'horloge vient de sonner neuf heures ; partons si nous ne vou- lons pas perdre la partie la plus agreable de la juurnee. Ne vous sentez-vous pas fatigu^ ; n'aimeriez-vous pas h, vous as- seoir quelques minutes ? J'aimerais beaucoup cela voila un banc vide, asseyons-nous. 15t Jh With a Doctor. I was very unwell the day before yesterday; still worse yesterday, and I felt so bad this morning that I understood I was in want of a doctor's attendance. What ails you ? I have a violent head-ache ; I feel a pain in my limbs, and am not inclined to eat. Allow me to feel your pulse : it is rather quick. Please show me your tongue. Did you sleep well last night ? Not well at all ; I could not go to sleep before one o'clock in the morning. Do you feel thirsty ? Very : I had some lemonade yes- terday, but it did not quench ' my thirst. Have you coughed at all lately? Yes, I had two violent attacks of cough during the night. You caught a cold very probably : the weather has been rather changeable, and many persons suffer from bronchitis. I shall write a prescription for you. What do you advise me to eat this afternoon ? I think it wUl be best to abstain from having anything to-day: 1 hope you will have a good night's rest and to-mori'ow morn- ing, I shall call again hoping to find you a great deal better. Do you expect I shall be confined to my room for a long time ? Oh no ! you only require a little rest, and take great care not to catch cold. If you follow exactly all my prescffiptions, I have no doubt you will soon re- cover from this slight indis- position. Do you think smoking would do me any harm ? I do not think it would do you any good. Avec un Docteur. J'ai ete tres indispose avant-hier ; encore plus hier ; et je me suis senti si mal ce matin que j'ai compris que j 'avals besoin de I'assistance d'un docteur. Qu'avez-vous ? J'ai un violent mal de tete; je ressens une douleur dans les membres et je n'ai pas envie de manger. Permettez-moi de vous tater le pouls; il est un pen accelere. Veuillez me montrer votre lan- gue. Avez-vous bien dormi la nuit demi^re ? Pas bien du tout ; je n'ai pu m'en- dormir avant une heure du matin. Vous sentez-vous altere ? Tr^s altere : hier j'ai bu de la li- monade, mais elle n'a pas apais^ ma soif. Avez-vous touss^ demiferement ? Oui, j'ai eu deux violentes quintes de toux pendant la nuit. Vous vous etes probablement re- froidi : le temps a 6te tres va- riable et beaucoup de personnes souffrent de bronchites. Je vais vous ^crire une ordonnance. Que me couseillez-vous de manger cette apres-midi? Je pense qu'il vaudra mieux vous abstenir de rien prendie au- jourd'hui: j'espke que vous aurez un bon repos pendant la nuit, et demain matin je revien- drai avec I'espoir de vous trouver en bien meilleure sant^. Pensez-vous que je sois longtemps consign^ dans ma chambre? Oh non ! vous n'avez besoin que d'un peu de repos, et prenez grand soin de ne pas attraper un autre refroidissement. Si vous suivez exactement mes prescrip- tions, je ne doute pas que voB» vous remettiez bientfit de cette legere indisposition. Pensez-vous que fumer me fasse du mal ? Je ne pense pas que cela vous fasse de bien. 158 t Paris Museums. Which are the principal museums I ought to visit in this city. There are the Louvre and the Luxembourg Museums, where are the most celebrated paint- ings of the ancient masters, and many of living artists. Does the Louvre Museum contain anything else but paintings? It includes a splendid collection of statues of the Grecian school, and antiques ; also statues of more modern times, and of con- temporary sculptors. Are there any other museums worthy of a visit ? I should advise you to go to the Cluny museum, which contains very interesting collections of furniture and other objects or works of art of the mediaeval epoch. Is it free to the public? Yes, like all the Museums I men- tioned to you : there are, how- ever, days when the public are only admitted with tickets. Are these three the only museums in Paris? There are several others less im- portant : I shall only mention the Artillery Museum of St. Thomas d'Aquin, where you will see modern arms of all kinds in large numbers, arranged with much taste ; and a beautiful and complete collection of ancient arms and armour. Is it open every day? It is only opened to the general public on Sundays, Thursdays and holidays. Where are the paintings represent- ing the principal episodes of French history ? In the Versailles museum. When was the palace of Versailles transformed into picture gal- leries ? In the reign of Louis Philippe. Musoes de Paris. Quels sent les principaux musees que je devrais visiter dans cette ville ? II y a les musees du Louvre et du Luxembourg, ou sont les plus celebres tableaux des anciens maitres et beaucoup de tableaux d'artistes vivants. Le musee du Louvre contient-il autre chose que des peintures ? II renferme une splendide collec- tion de statues de I'ecole Grecque et d'antiques ; et aussi des sta- tues de temps plus modernes et de sculpteurs contemporains. Y a-t-il d'autres musees qui meri- tent une visite ? Je vous conseillerais d'aller au musee de Cluny, qui contient des collections tres-interessantes de meubles et d'autres objets ou d'oeuvres d'art du Moyen &ge. Est-il ouvert au public? Qui, comme tons les musees que je vous ai mentionnes ; il y a cependaut des jours ou le public n'est admis qu'avec des billets. Ces trois musees sont-ils les seuls musees de Paris? II y en a plusieurs autres moins importants : je mentionnerai seulement le musee d'artillerie de St Thomas d'Aquin, ou vous verrez des armes modernes de toute sorte, en grand nombre, arrangees avec beaucoup de gout;, et une belle et complete collec- tion d'armes ancieuues et d'ar- mures. Est-il ouvert tons les jours? II n'est ouvert a tout le monde que les Dimanches, les Jeudis et les jours de fete. Oil sont les tableaux qui repre- sentent les principaux episodes de I'histoire de France? Au musee de Versailles. Quand le palais de Versailles fut- il transforme en galeries de peinture ? Sous le r^gne de Louis Philippe. 169 /? The Streets of Paris. I am going to Paris next week ; can you give me some informa- tion about the streets of that beautiful city ? It would take too long to enu- merate the principal streets of Paris : Paris has greatly changed these last fifty years, and prin- cipally during the second em^ pire. However I will mention the "Grands Boulevards" which run from "La Madeleine" to "La Place de la Bastille." Are there any other streets which bear the name of Boulevards ? Yes, there are the Boulevards de Sebastopol and Strasbourg which run in a straight line from the Seine to the Eastern railway sta- tion and are prolonged on the other side ofthe river by the Bou- levard St. Michel ; the Boulevard Hausmann and many others. Which is the longest street in Paris? The Eue Lafayette which with its prolongation, the Eue d'Alle- magne, is more than 5 kilometres long and starts from the new Opera House. What do you call the street which runs round Paris, along the ramparts ? It has different names, generally those of the Generals of the first empire, like Victor, Brune, Bessi^.re, Lannes, Mortier, &c., but bears the general name of Boulevards Exterieurs. Which street do you consider as the finest in Pans? The Rue de Rivoli, with its ar- cades and the splendid build- ings which are in it. It is more than three kilometres long. Are there any embankments in Paris? On each s^Ide the river Seine is embanked, and its banks planted with rows of trees. Les Rues de Paris. Je vais h Paris la semaine pro* chaine ; pouvez-vous me donner quelques renseignements sur les rues de cette belle ville? II me faudrait trop longtemps pour enumerer les principales rues de Paris : Paris a beau coup change depuis cinquante ans, et princi- palement pendant le second em- pire. Cependant je mention- nerai les grands boulevards qui s'etendent de la Madeleine a la place de la Bastille. Y a-t-il d'autres rues qui portent le nom de Boulevards ? Oui, il y a les Boulevards de Se- bastopol et de Strasbourg qui vont en droite ligne de la Seine k la gare du chemin de fer de I'Est et se prolongent de I'autre c6te du fleuve par le Boulevard St- Michel ; le Boulevard Haus- mann et beaucoup d'autres. Quelle est la plus longue rue de Paris? La rue Lafayette qui, avec sa pro- longation, la rue d'Allemagne» a plus de cinq kilometres de long et part du nouvel Op^ra. Comment appelez-rous la rue qui fait le tour de Paris, le long des remparts ? Elle a differents noms : gen^rale- ments ceux des generaux du premier empire, comme Victor, Brune, Bessi^res, Lannes, Mor- tier, &c. ; mais elle porte le nom general de Boulevards Exte- rieurs. Quelle rue considerez-vous comme la plus belle rue de Paris ? La rue de Rivoli, avec ses arcades et les splendides edifices qui s'y trouvent. Elle a plus de trois kilometres de longueur. Y a-t-il des quais k Paris ? De chaque c6te la Seine est bordee de quais, et ses bords sont pla:*<48 de rangees d'arbres. 160 How to Progress in French. I have learnt French at school ; I took many lessons, in classes and privately : I know my grammar pretty well, and un- derstand nearly everything I read, but cannot say two words in an intelligible manner. What should I do ? Hear French spoken ; have a mas- ter that speaks to you in French, very slowly at first, and then more quickly, on the subjects which are familiar to you Is it, then, more useful to listen and to try to understand what is said in a language than trying to speak it one s self? Both are useful and necessary; but you will never pronounce well yourself, if you do not train your ear by hearing that language spoken as frequently as you can. When may I hope to be able to speak myself? When your ears can recognise a gpoken word as quickly and as accurately as your eyes can read it when it is written or pjrinted. Try to pronounce perfectly some words which contain the great- est diflSculties of the French pronunciation, then refer to them for any other word of sim- ilar spelling. Read aloud as much as you can, as soon as you have acquired more facility in your pronunciation. Then try to speak and you will be aston- ished at your progress. Can you tell me what is the cause of my not understanding French when spoken? It is because you are not particular enough about the word linking, when you speak yoursel f. Comment faire des pro- gres en Fran^ais. J'ai appris le Fran^ais k I'ecole; j'ai pris beaucoup de legons dans des classes et de le5ons particu- lieres; je sais assez bien ma grammaire et je comprends pres- que tout ce que je lis ; mais je ne sais pas dire deux mots d'une maniere intelligible. Que de- vrais-je faire? Entendre parler frangais; avoir un maitre qui vous parle Fran- 5ais, tres lentement d'abord, et ensuite plus vite, sur les sujets qui vous sont familiers. Est-il done plus utile d'ecouter et d'essayer de comprendre ce que Ton dit dans une langne, que d'essayer de la parler soi- meme? Les deux choses sont utiles et ne- cessaires ; mais vous ne pronon- cerez jamais bien vous-meme, si vous ne dressez pas votre oreille en entendant parler cette langue aussi frequemment que vous le pouvez. Quand puis-je esp^rer pouvoir par- ler moi-meme ? Quand votre oreille pourra recon- naitre un mot parle aussi vite et aussi exactement que vos yeux peuvent le lire quand il est ecrit ou imprime. Essayez de prononcer parfaitement quel- ques mots qui contiennent les plus grandes difficultes de la prononciation franjaise, et rap- port«z-y, tout autre mot d'line orthographe analogue. Lisez k haute voix autant que vous le pouvez, aussit8t que vous avez acquis plus de facilite dans votre prononciation. Essayez alors de parler et vous serez etonne de vos progr^s. Pouvez-vous me dire quelle est la cause de ce que je ne comprends pasle Frangais quand on le parle? C'est parceque vous n'etes pas assez minutieux au sujet de la liaison, quand vous parlez Tous-merae. FRENCH YERBS. REGULAR & IRREGULAR. BY A. P. HUGUENET. OONTBISTTS. PAGI Definitions 3 Formation of the Tenses 6 The auxiliary verb avoir, to have 8 The auxiliary verb Stre, tohe 10 The verb aimer, to love {1st Conjugation) 12 The verb punir, to punish (2nd Conjugation) 13 The verb recevoir, to receive (3rd Conjugation) 14 The yerh rendre, to render (4th Conjugation) 15 Compound tenses conjugated with avoir 16 Compound tenses conjugated with Ure 18 Transitive verbs used passively 20 Reflective verbs 21 Conjugation of verbs used negatively 22 Conjugation of verbs used in- terrogatively and inter- rogatively and negatively 23 Irregular and defective verbc — Istgroup 24 2nd group 26 Government of verbs 32 Table of the endings of French Verbs (Regular and Ir- regular) 85 THE VERB. The verb (Latin, verhum, the word) is so called because it ie the most important part of speech. There can be no sentence without a verb. Therefore a perfect knowledge of verbs is neces- sary for any one who wishes to write or to speak a language in a correct and intelligible manner. The simplest definition of the verb is as follows : The verb is the word which expresses the action performed by the subject, or the state of the subject. je travaille^ I worh; il dortjhe sleeps; je suis malade, I am ill. 1. Transitive Verbs in Active Voice. Transitive verbs or active verbs are those which, not expressing by themselves any complete idea, require a word in the accusative case after them to complete the sense. That word answers the question qui, whom, or que, what ? yaime mon. pere, I love my father ; je lis le livre, I read the book. 2. Transitive Verbs in Passive Voice. Verbs are in the Passive Voice when the action, instead of being performed by the subject, is performed on the subject. Mon pere est aim<^, my father is loved. Le verre est cass^, the glass is broken. The passive voice is formed with the auxiliary Stre, to be, and the past participle of the transitive verb. 3. Intransitive or Neuter Verbs. Intransitive or neuter verbs are those which generally express a complete sense by themselves. If any word be added to them it never answers the question qui or que, but one of the questions d qui, to whom, or d quoi, to what ; de qui, of whom, or de quoi, of what, &c. L'enfant dort, the child sleeps ; le livre appartient k mon pere, the book belongs to my father. 4. Reflective, Pronominal, and Reciprocal Verbs. Reflective and pronominal verbs are used when the action is performed by the subject on itself. II 86 hrHlay he burnt himself; ils se soimennent, they remember. Reflective verbs are transitive verbs which are conjugated with two personal pronouns of the same person, the one in t'he nominative case, as a subject, and the other in the accusative case, as an object or complement. Pronominal verbs are verbs which can never be used without two pronouns, as se repentir, to repent ; se souvenir, to remember ; se moquer, to mock, &c. Reciprocal verbs are those which, being identi-^al in form to reflective and pronominal verbs, express that the action has been exchanged between two or more persons. Ils se saluent, they salute each other. lis se haissent, they hate one another. Ils s'4crivent, they write to one another, 6. Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal verbs are those which can only be used in the third person singular. II pleut, it rains ; il neige, it snows; il faut, it is necessary. 6. Defective Verbs. Defective verbs are those which are not used in all tenses as g^sir, to lie ; ou'ir, to hear ; clore^ to close ; sourdre, to spring ; tistre, to weave, &c. TENSES and MOODS. Tenses. Tenses are the inflexions of verbs by which they are made to signify that the action took place, takes place, or will take place at a certain time. There are in reality only three tenses, past, present, and future; but a past action may have taken place at a more or less remote time, and a future action could take place sooner or latec This is why there are different past and future tenses, while there is only one present tense. Moods. The moods are inflexions of the verb which indicate in what manner the assertion expressed by the verb is made. There are five moods, as follows : 1. The indicative, which simply expresses an affirmation. llparle fran§ais, he speaks French. 2. The imperative expresses an order or a prayer. Parlez, speak. I)onnez-m.oi un morceau de pain, give me a piece of bread. 3. The conditional indicates that the action is subject to a con- dition. Je chanterais si vous le vouliez, I would sing if you liked it. 4 The subjunctive always depends on another verb which pre- cedes it, and which generally expresses an idea of doubt, fear, uncertainty or negation. Je doute qu'il vienne, I doubt whether he may come. Je crains qu'il ne soit malade, I fear that he may be ill. II n'est pas sur qu'il parle, it is not sure that he may speak. 5. The infinitive expresses the affirmation in an indefinite manner, without referring to numbers or persons. II est utile d^dtudier, it is useful to study. C'est en lisant qu'on s'instruit, it is by reading that one becomes learned. Formation of the Tenses of French Verbs. Besides the division of the Verb into simple and compound tenses, which is common to languages in general, French Gram- mar divides the tenses into two categories : — primitive and derivative tenses. The primitive tenses are those which serve to form th« others ; they are five in number : The present of the infinitive ; The present participle ; The past participle ; The present indicative ; The past definite. The derivative tenses are, as their name indicates, those which are formed from the primitive tenses. 6 1. The Infinitive Present forms two tenses : a. The future absolute, by the change of r, oir, or re into rai: aimer : ysame-rai. punir : je puni-rai. recevoir : je recev-rat. rendre : je rend-rai. to love : I shall love, to punish : I shall punish, to receive : I shall receive, to render : I shall render. b. The present conditional^ by the change of r, oir, or re into rai* . aimer : j aime-ra?^. punir: je puni-rais. recevoir : je recev-raiff. rendre : je rend-raw. to love : I should love, to punish : I should punish, to receive : I should receive, to render : I should render. 2. The Present Participle forms three, or rather two and a half tenses : a. The three persons plural of the present of the indicative, by the change of ant into on^, ez, ent : -imant : nous oim-ons, vous aim-e«, ils &\va-ent. punissant : nous puniss-OTW, vous puniss-e2, ils puniss-en^. rendant : nous rend-ons, vous rend-e2!, ils xen^-ent. loving : we love, you love, they love, punishing : we punish, you piunish, they punish, rendering : we render, you render, they render. Exception. — Yerbs in oir (third conjugation) end in the third person plural of the indicative in oivent, and not in event: recevant : nous recev-oTis, vous recev-e2, ils leq-oivent. receiving : we receive, you receive^ they receive. h. The imperfect of the indicative, by change of ant into ais. aimant : j'aim-aw. punissant : je pmiss-aw. recevant : je recev-ais. rendant : je rend-aw. loving : I was loving, punishing : I ivas punishing, receiving : I was receiving, rendering : I was rendering. c The present of the subjunctive, by the change of ant into « ; •imant : que j'aim-e. •punissant : que je punis8-«. rendant : que je reud-«. loving: that I may love, punishing: thai I may punish, rendering : that I may render. Exception. — Verbs in oir (third conjugation) change evant into oivc^ in the three persons singular and the 3rd person plural : recevant : que je ret^-oive... ; qu'ils reg-oivew^ 3. The Past Participle forms all the compound tenses^ with the help of the auxiliaries avoir (to have) or itre (to be). (*) aime : j'ai aime, j'avais aime, j'aurai aime, &c. puni: j'aurais puni, que j'aie puni, &c. arriv^ : je suis arriv^, j'etais arriv^, je serai arrive, &c. tombe : je serai tombe, que je sois tonibe,que je fusse tombe, &c. loved ; I have loved, I had loved, I shall have loved, punished: I should have punished, that I may have punished, dec. arrived : I have arrived, I had arrived, I shall have arrived, fallen : I shall have fallen, that I may have fallen, thai I might have fallen. 4. The Present op the Indicative forms the Imperativt by the suppression of the pronouns subjects je, nous and vov^ : j aime : aime. nous aimons : aimons. vous aimez : aimez. je punis : punis. nous punissons : punissons. vous punissez : punissez. / love : love (thou), we love : let us love, you love : love (ye). I punish : punish (thou), we punish : let u^ punish, you punish: punish (ye). 5. The Past Definitive iorms the Imperfect of the Subjundivt by the addition of se to the 2nd person singular. tu aimas : que j aimas-se. tu punis : que je punis-stf. tu re^us : que je re9us-5g. tu rendis : que je rendis-5«. I loved; thai I might love. I punished: that I might punish. I received : that I might receive. I rendered: that I might render. (*) All active verbs have their compound tenses formed with the auxiliary avoir. Neuter verbs generally take avoir. The majority of those expressing mot^ menti&ke itre. All reflective verbs take ttr* in their compound tense*. 8 The Auxiliary Verb avoir, "to have. Present Indicative (Indicatif Present). nous avons, we have. J'ai, I have. tu as, thou hast. S^ 11 (elle) a, he (she, it) has. Imperfect (Imparfait). YOvS avez, you have. lis (elles) ont, they have. j'arais, I had. tu avals, thou hadst. 11 (elle) avalt, he (she, it) had. nous avlons, we had. vous aviez, you had. lis (elles) avaient, they Jiad, j eus, 1 had. tu eus, thou hadst. 11 (elle) eut, he (she, it) had. Past Definite (Pass^ defini). nous eumes, we had. vous eutes, yo2i had. lis (elles) eurent, they had. 1st Future (Futur dbsolu). j'aurai, I shall or loill have. tu auras, thou wilt have. U (elle) aura, he (she, it) will have. nous aurons, we shall or will have. vous aurez, you will have. ils (elles) auront, they will have. 1st Conditional {Gonditionnel pr^ent). j'aurais, / should or would have. tu aurais, thou wouldst have. H (elle) aurait, he would have. nous aurions, we should or would. vous auriez, you would have[have. ils(elles)auraient, they would have. Imperative {Imp^ratif). ale, have (thou). ayons, let us have. ayez, Tiave (yt). Present Subjunctive {Subjonctif present). quej'aie, that I may or should have, that I have. que tu ales, that thou may est have. qu'il ait, that he mxiy have. que nous ayons, thai we may have. que vous ayez, that you vnay have, qu'ils aient, that they m/iy have. Imperfect {Imparfait). que j'eusse, that Imight or should have, that I had. que tu eusses, that thou mightest have. qu'il eAt, that he might have. que nous eussions, th^t we might have. que Tous eussiez, that you might have. qu'ils eussent, thai they migki have. Present Infinitive {Infinitif present). avoir, to have. Present Participle {Participe pr^ent), ayant, having. Past Participle {Participe poisd), eu, had. COMPOUND TENSES. j'ai en, / Tmve had. tu as eu, thou hast had. il a eu, A« has had. elle a eu, she hxis had. Perfect {Pass^ ind^fini). nous avons eu, we have had. vous avez eu, you have had. ilsonteu, ltj,^f^^,had, elles out eu, J ^ Pluperfect {Plus-que-parfait), j'avais eu, I had had. tu avals eu, thou hadst had. il avait eu, he had had. nous avions eu, we had had. vous aviez eu, you had had. ils avaient eu, they had had. 2nd Pluperfect (Passe anUrieur). J eus eu, / had had. tu eus eu, thou hadst had. il eut eu, h^ had had. nous eurnes eu, we had had. vous eutes eu, you had had. ils eurent eu, they had had. 2nd Future (Futur anUrieur). j'aurai eu, / shall have had. i nous aurons eu, we shall have had. tu auras eu, thou wilt have had. vous aurez eu, you will have had. il aura eu, he toill have had. \ ils auront eu, they will have had. 2nd Conditional (Conditionnel pass^. j'aurais (*) en, I should havehad. \ nonssiurions en,weshoiildhavehxid. tu aurais eu, tJiou wouldst have had. il aurait eu, he would have had. vous auriez eu, you would have had. ils auraient eu,they would havehad. Perfect Subjunctive {Suhjondif pass^. que j'aie eu, that I may have hud. que tu aies eu, that thou mayest have had. qu'il ait eu, that he may have had. que nous ayons eu, that we may have had. que vous ayez eu, that you may have had. qu'ils aient eu, that they may have had. Pluperfect (Plus-que-parfait). que j'eusse eu, that I might have had. que tu eusses eu, that thou mightest have had. qu'il cut eu, that he might have had. que nous eussions eu, that we might have had. que vous eussiez eu, that you might have had. qu'ils eussent eu, that they might have had. Past Infinitive (Infinitif pass^ ). avoir eu, to have had. Past Participle {Participe pass^). ayant eu, having had. (*) The imperfect of the subjunctive is often used instead of the conditional of the auxiliary verb : j'etisse eu, tu etisses eu, il e(Lt tu, nous eussions eu, wu* eussiet tu, ils etissent eu. 10 The Auxiliary Verb *tre, "to be-** Present Indicative (Indicatif present). je suis, I am. tu es, thou art. 11 (eUe) est, he (she, it) is. nous somraes, we are. vous etes, you are. lis (elles) sont, they are. Imperfect (Imparfait). j'etais, I was. tu etais, thou wast. 11 (elle) etait, he (she, it) was. nous etions, we were. vous etiez, you were. Us (elles) etaient, they were. Past Definite (Pass^ d^fini). je fus, I was. tu fus, thou wast. 11 (elle) fut, he (she, it) was. nous fumes, we were. vous futes, you were. lis (elles) furent, they were. 1st Future (Futur absolu). je serai, I shall be. tu seras, thou wilt be. U (elle) sera, he (she, it) will be. nous serons, we shall be. vous serez, you will be. lis (elles) seront, they will be. 1st Conditional (Gonditionnel present). je serais, / should be. tu serais, thou wouldst be. U (elle) serait, he (she, it) would be. nous serious, we should be. vous seriez, you would be. Us (elles) seraient, they would be. Imperative (Imp^ratif). sols, be (thou). soyons, let v,s be. soyez, be (ye). Present Subjunctive {Suhjonctif present). que nous soyons, that we may be que je sols, that I may be, that I be. que tu sols, that thou mayest be. qu'U soit, that he may be. que vous soyez, that you may be. qu'Us Solent, that they may be. Imperfect {Imparfait). que je fusse, that I might or should be, that I were. que tu fusses, "^^^- 2nd Pluperfect {Pass^ anterieur), je fus tombe or tombee, I had fallen. tu fus tombe or tombee, thoic hadst fallen. 11 fut tombe, he (it) had fallen. elle fut tombee, she (it) had fallen. nous fumes tombes or tombees, 2oe had fallen. vous futes tombes or tombees, you had fallen. 2nd Future (Futur anterieur). je serai tombe ar tombee, I shall have fallen. tu seras tombe or tombee, thou loilt have fallen, il sera tombe, he (it) will have fallen. elle sera tombee, she (it) will Imve fallen. nous serous tombes or tombees, we shall have fallen. vous serez tombes or tombees, you shall have fallen. dirrontTomb^es ]«-y ^« ^-Z-"'-- (*) After Hre, the past participle agrees witli the subject. 19 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 2nd Conditional (*) (Fass^). je serais tomb6 or tombee, / should have fallen. tu serais tombe or tombee, thou wouldd have fallen, il serait tombe, he {it) would have fallen, elle serait tombee, she {it) would have fallen. nous serions tombes or tombees, we should have fallen, vous seriez tombes or tombees, you would have fallen. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect (Pass^J. que je sois tombe or tombee, that I may have fallen que tu sois tombe or tombee, that thou may est have fallen, qu'il soit tombe, that he {it) mxiy have fallen. qu'elle soit tombee, that she {it) may have fallen. que nous soyons tombes or tombees, that we may have fallen, que vous soyez tombes or tombees, that you may have fallen. Pluperfect (Plus-que-parfait). que je fusse tombe or tombee, that I might have fallen que tu fusses tombe or tombee, that thou mightest have fallen, qu'il flit tombe, that he {it) might have fallen. qu'elle fftt tombee, that she {it) inight have fallen. que nous fussions tombes or tombees, that we might have fallen. que vous fussiez tombes or tombees, that you might have fallen. INFINITIVE MOOD. Past (Pass^). §tre tomb^ or tombee, tombes or tombees, to have fallen. Past Participle (Participe pass^). fttant tombe or tombee, tombes or tombees, having fallen. (•) The following form is also used: — je fusse tombe or tombee. tu fusses tombe or tombee. il fut tombe, elle fut tombee. nous fussions tombes or tombees. vous fussiez tombes or tombees. lis fussent tombes, elles fussent tombees. 20 Conjugation of Transitive Verbs Used Passively. Etre aime, to he loved. Present Indicative (Indicatif present). je suis aime, / ajn loved. tu es aime, thou art loved. il est aime, he is loved. elle est aimee, she is loved. nous sommes aimes, we are loved. vous etes aimes, you are loved. ilssont aimes \ they are loved. elles sont aimees ) '^ Imperfect (Im'parfait). j'etais aime, 1 was loved. tu etais aime, thou wast loved. il 6tait aime, he was loved. je fus aime, / was loved. tu fus aime, thou wast loved. il fut aime, h^ was loved. nous etions aim^s, we were loved. vous etiez aimes, you were loved. ils etaient aimes, they were loved. Past Definite (Passe d^fini). nous fumes aimes, we were loved. vous futes aimes, yoti were loved. ils furent aimes, they were loved. 1st Future (Futur absolu). je serai aime, I shall be loved. tu seras aim 6, thou wilt he loved. il sera aime, he will he loved. nous serons aimes, ?3ls, he did not love. I ils n'aimsiient-^siSythey did 7iot love. Past Definite {Pass^ d^fini). je n'aimai pas, I did not love. tu n'aimas pas, thou didst not love. il n'aima pas, he did not love. Future {Futur). je n'aimerai pas, I shall, will not love. tu n'aimeras pas, thou shalt, ivilt not love. [love. il n'aimera pas, he shall, will not nous riaima,mes-pa,s,wedidnotlove. vous n'aimates pas, you did not love. ils n'aimerent })a&,ihey didnotlove. we shall. nous n aimerons pas, will not love. vous n'aimerez pas, you shall, will not love. [not love. ils n'aimeront pas, they shall, will 1st Conditional {Conditionnel present). je n'aimerais pas, / should, would not love. [wouldst not love. tu n'aimerais pas, thou shouldst, il n'aimerait pas, he should, would not love. nous n'aimerions pas, we should, would not love, [woidd not love. vous n'aimeriez pas, you should, ils n'aimeraient pas, they should, would not love. Imperative (Imperatif). n'aime pas, do not love, n'aimons pas, let us not love, n'aimez pas, do not love. Present Subjunctive {Subjonctif present). que je n'aime pas, that I may not love. [mayest not love. que tu n'aimes pas, that thou qu'il n'aime pas, that he may Tiot love. que nous n'aimions pas, that we may not love. [may not love. que vous n'aimiez pas, that you qu'ils n'aiment pas, that they may not love. Imperfect (Imparfait). que je n'aimasse pas, that I might not love. [mightest not love. que tu n'aimasses pas, that thou qu'il n'aimat pas, that he might not love. Present Infinitive {Infiwiiif present) : ne pas aimer, not to love. Present Participle (Participe present) : n'aimaut pas, n^t loving. Past Participle (Participe pass^) : ne pas aime, not loved. que nous n'aimassions pas, that we might not love, [might not love. que vous n'aimassiez pas, that you qu'ils n'aimassent pas, that they might not love. 23 French Verbs conjugated Interrogatively .(*) Interrogatively and Negatively. Aimer, to love. Ne pas aimer, not to love. Present Indicative (Indicatif present). aime-je "i do I love ? aimes-tu ? dost thou love f aime-t-il ? does he love ? aimoiis-nous ? do we love f aimez-vous ? do you love t ainient-ils ? do they love ? n' aime-je pas ? do I not lovet n'aimes-tu pas ? dost thou not love f n' aime-t-il pas ? does he not love i n'aimons-nous pas ? do we not lovef n'aimez-voiispas ? do you not love? n'aiment-ils pas ? do they not lovef aimais-je ? did I love ? aimais-tu ? didst thou love f aimait-il ? did he love 1 aimions-noiis ? did we love f aimiez-vous ? did you love f aimaient-ils ? did they love ? Imperfect (Imparfait). n'aimais-jepas ? did I not love J n*aimais-tu pas ? didst thou not lovef n'aimait-il pas ? did he not love f n'aimions-nouspas? did we not lovef n'aimiez-vous pas? didyou'not lovef n'aimaient-ils -p&sldid they not lovet aimai-je ? did Hove? aimas-tu ? didst thou love f aima-t-il ? did he love ? aimames-nous ? did we love t aim§,tes-vous ? did you love ? aimerent-ils ? did they love ? Past Definite (Pass^ d^fini). aimerai-je ? shall 1 love ? aimeras-tu ? wilt thou love ? n'aimai-je pas ? did I not love f n'aimas-tu pas? didst thou not lovel n'aima-t-il pas ? did he not love ? n'aimames-nous pas? did we not love ? \love f n'aimates-vous pas ? did you not n'aimerent-ils pas ? did they not love ? 1st Future {Futur ahsolu). aimera-t-il ? will he love f aimerons-nous ? shall we love f aimerez-vous ? will you love f aimeront-ils ? will they love f 1st CONDITI' aimerais-je ? should I love ? aimerais-tu ? wouldst thou love ? aimerait-il ? would he love ? aimerions-nous ? should we love f aimeriez-vous ? would you love ? aimeraient ils ? would they love ? n'aimerai-je pas ? shall I not lovef n'aimeras-tu pas ? wilt thou not love ? n'aimera-t-il pas ? will he not lovef n'aimerons-nous pas ? shall we not love ? n'aimerez-vous pas ? will you not love ? [love f n'aimeront-ils pas ? will they not 1st Conditional {Gonditionnel present). n'aimerais-je pas ? should I not love'i n'aimerais-tu pas ? wouldst thou not love ? [love f n'aimerait-il pas ? would he not n'aimerions-nous pas? should we not love ? n'aimeriez-vous pas ? would you not love f [not love. n'aimeraient-ils pas? would they {*) Verbs are never used Interrogatively in tlie Imperative nor in the Subjunctive, as an order could not be given under the form of a question, and a verb in the Subjunctive is always governed by another verb which expresses the Interro- gation if the sentence be Interrogative. 24 Irregular and Defective Verbs. FIEST GROUP. Tliu group consists of all irregular verbs wliich form their derivative tenses in accordance with the rules given for the formation of tenses. Verbs, compounds of others, are only given when they are not conjugated like them. PRIMITIVE TENSES.- Present Present Past Par- Present Past Infinitive. Pakticiple ticiple. Indicative Definite. bouillir, to hoil bouillant bouilli je bous je bouillis choir, to fall chu couvrir, to cover couvrant convert je couvre je couvns dormir, to sleep dormant dormi je dors je dor mis forfaire, to forfeit forfait fair, to shun, fiee fuyant fui je fuis je fuis gesir, to lie gisant ilgtt issir, to issue issu mentir, to lie mentant menti je mens je mentis offrir, to offer offrant offert j'ofFre rj'otfris ouir, to hear oui j'ouis ouvrir, to open ouvrant ouvert j'ouvre j'ouvris partir, to depart partant parti je pars je partis repentir (so), to re- se repentant repenti je me repens je me repen- pent tis 8aillir(*), toproject saillant sailli il saille il saillit sentir, to feel sentant senti je sens je sentis servir, to serve servant servi je sers je servis sortir, to go out sortant sorti je sors je sortis •ouffrir, to suffer souffrant souffert je souffre je soutlVis tressailir, to start tressaillant tressailli je tresaille je tressaillis retir, to clothe vetant vetu je vets je vetis pleuvoir, to rain pleuvant plu il pleut il plut surseoir, to reprieve sursoyant sursis rje sursois je sursis absoudre, to absolve absolvant absous, (f) absoute j 'absous battre, to beat battant battu je bats je battis braire, to bray il brait bruire, to rustle il bruit clore, to close clos je clos conclure, to con- concluant conclu je conclus je conclus elude (*) Saillir in the sense of to spring out, to stream is regular. 25 PRIMITIVE TENSES. Present Present Past Par- Present Past Infinitive Participle ticiple Indicative Definitk conduire (*), to conduisant conduit je conduis je conduisii eon-duct confire, to pickle, confisant confit je confis je confis preserve connaitre(+), to connaissant connu je connais je connus know coudre, to sew. cousant cousu je couds je cousis craindre( J) , to fear craignant craint je crains e craignis croire, to believe croyant cru e crois e crus croitre, to grow croissant cni e crois je crus ecrire, to vrrite ecrivant ecrit j'ecris i'ecrivis exclure, to exclude excluant exclu j'exclus j'exclus frire, to fry frit je fria lire, to read lisant lu je lis jelus luire, to shine luisant lui je luis maudire, to curse maudissant maudit je maudis je maudis medire, to slander medisant medit je medis je medis mettre, to put mettant mis je mets je mis moudre, to grind moulant moulu je mouds je moulus naitre, to he horn naissant ne je nais je naquis nuire, to hurt nuisant nui je nuis je nuisis plaire, to please to plaisant plu je plaia je plus TQ&ovAxQ,to resolve resolvant resou, r^- solu je resous je resolus rire, to laugh riant ri jeris |je ris rompre, to hreak rompant rompu je romps je rompis sourdre, to spring suffire, to suffice suffisant suffi je suffis je suffis" suivre, to follow suivant suivi je suis je suivis taire (se), to he se taisant tu je me tais je me tus silent tistre, to weave tissu traire, to milk trayant trait je trais ySimcve,to conquer vainquant vaincu je vainca je vainquis vivre, to live vivant vecu je vis je vecus (*) All verbs ending in uire, except hruire, luire and nuire, are conjugated like conduire. (t) All verbs ending in aitre, except nattre, are conjugated like connaUre. {%) All verbs ending in aindre, eindre and oindre, are irregular, and must be conjugated like craindre. 2« lEEEGULAE AND SECOND This group consists of the irregular verbs which do not form all NoTBS. T. All verbs form their Imperfect of the Subjunctive regularly from the Past Definite. Savoir, to know, and avoir, to have, are the only ones in which the Imperfects of the Indicativeje savais,j' avals are not formed regularly from the Present Participle. PRIMITIVE TENSES. Present Infinitive. Present Participle Past Participle Present Indicative Past Definite. aller, to go allant aU6 je vais j'aUai envoyer, to send envoyant envoy^ j'envoie j'envoyai acquerir, to acquire acquerant acquis j'acquiers j 'acquis courir, to run courant coum je cours jecoums cueillir, to gather cueillant cueilli je cueille je cueillis faillir, to/ail. faillant faiUi / je faux, or\ \ je faillisj jefaillis mourir, to die mourant mort je meurs je mourns tenir, to hold tenant tenu je tiens jetins renir, to come venant Venn je viens je vina 27 DEFECTIVE VEEBS. GROUP. tlieir derivative tenses in accordance with the rules of formation. II. The persons of those tenses regularly formed from the primitive tenses are printed in italics. III. Derivative tenses which are not given here are formed regularly. DERIVATIVE TENSES, of which the formation is irregular, either throughout or in certain persons only. I Pkesent Indicative : Je vais, tu va, il va ; nous allons, vous allez, ils vont.— Futubj; : J'irai, tu iras, &c. — Conditional : J'irais, tu irais, &c. — Imperative : Va, allons, allez. — Present Subjunctive : Que j'aille, que tu allies, qiLe nous allions, que vous alliez, qu'ils aillent. Future : J'enverrai, tu enverras, &c. — Conditional : J'enverrais, tu enverrais, &c. Present Indicative : J'acquiers, tu acquiers, il acquiert, nous acquironSy voua acquirez, ils acquierent. — Future : J'acquerrai, tuacquerras, &c. — Conditional : J'acquerrais, tu acquerrais, &c. — Present Subjunctive: Que j'acquiere, que tu acquieres, qu'il acquiere ; que nous acqv^rions, que vous acqu^riez, qu'ils acquierent. f Future : Je courrai, tu courras, &c. — Conditional : Je courrais, tu cour- \ rais, &c. / Future : Je cueillerai, tu cueilleras, &c. — Conditional : Je cueillerais, \ tu cueillerais, &c. I Future : Je faudrai, or je faillirai, &c.— Conditional: Je faudrais, or ( jefaillirais. Present Indicative : Je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt ; nou^ mourons, vous mourez, ils meurent. — Future : Je mourrai, tu mourras, &c.— Con- ditional : Je mourrais, tu mourrais, &c. — Present Subjunctive : Que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure ; qu^ nov^s mourions, que vous mouriez, qu'ils meurent. Present Indicative : Je tiens, tu tiens, il tient, nous tenons, vous tenez^ ils tiennent. — Future: Je tiendrai, tu tiendras, &c.— Conditional : Je tiendrais, tu tiendrais, &c. — Present Subjunctive : Que te tienne, que tu tiennes, qu'il tienne ; que nous tenions, que vous teniez, qu'ils tiennent. (Present Indicative : Je viens, tu viens, il vient ; nous venons, vous ven^z, ils viennent. — Future : je viendrai, tu viendras, &c. — Con- ditional : Je viendrais, tu viendrais, &c. — Present Subjunctive : Que je vienne, que tu viennes, qu'il vienne : qu^ nous venions, qtie voiLS veniez, qu'ils viennent. 28 SECOND Present Infinitive. Present Participle Past Participle Present Indicative Past Definite. d^choir, to decay, to decline ••• d^chu je dechois je dechus echoir, to fall due ^ch^ant ^chu il echoit il echut falloir, to be necessary ... fallu Hfaut ilfaUut mouvoir, to move mouvant ma je meua jemus pouvoir, to be able pouvant pu je peux or puis jepus pourvoir, to provide pourvoyant pourvu je pourvois je pourvus prevaloir, to prevail prevalant prevalu je prevaux je pr^valuis pre voir, to foresee prevoyant prevu je prevois je previa *s'asseoir, to sit s'asseyant assii je m'assieds je m'assii savoir, to know sachant sa jesaia jesui seoir, toft seant ••• il sied ••• * Asseoir is also conjugated more regularly, its primitive tenses being asaoyant. (utu, j'assois, j'assis. 29 G R TJ V— Continued, DBRIVATIVB TENSES. { Present Indicative : Jt dichois, tu dichois, il dechoit ; nous dechjoyons, \ vous declioyez, ils dechoient. — Future : Je decherrai, tu decherras, &c, — < Conditional : Je decherrais, tu decherrais, &c. — Present Subjunctive: I Que je d^choie, que tu dichoies, qu'il dechoie, que vov^ dechoyions, que vous dechoyiez, quHls dAchoient. rrruRE: II eclierra. — Conditional: II echerrait. — Present Subjunctive: Qu'il echoie. /Future : II faudra. — Conditional : II faudrait. — Present Subjunctivk : \ Qu'il faille, {Present Indicative: Je meus, tu meits, il meut, nov^ mouvons, vous mouvez, ils meuvent. — Present Subjunctive: Quejemeuve, que tu meuves, qu'il meuve, que nous mouvions, que vous mouviez, qu'ils meuvent. f resent Indicative : Je peux or je puis, tu peux, il peut, nous pouvons^ vous pouvezy ils peuvent. — Future: Je pourrai, tu pourras, &c. — Condi- tional: Je pourrais, tu pourrais, &c. — Present Subjunctive : Qu« je puisse, que tu puisses, &c. Future : Je pourvoirai. — Conditional : Je pourvoirais. /Future : Je prevaudrai. — Conditional : Je prevaudrais. No Imperative. \ Present Subjunctive : Que je pr^vale. Future : Je prevoirai. — Conditional : Je prevoirais. /'Present Indicative: Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assied; nous nous J asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils - s' asseient. — Future: Je m'assierai, tu I t'assieras, &c., also, je m'asseierai, tu t'asseieras, &c. — Conditional : J« \t'assieras, &c., also, je m'asseierai, ti m'assierais, tu t'assierais, &c,, also, j e m'asseierais, tu t'asseierais, (fcc. {Present Indicative : Je sais, tu sais, il salt ; nous savons, vous savez, ils savent. — Imperfect : Je savais, tu savais, &c. — Future: Je saurai, tu sauras, &c. — Conditional : Je saurais, tu saurais, &c. — Imperativi: Sache, sachons, sachez. (Present Indicative: II sied, ilssieent. — Tmpt^.rfect: II seyait, ils seyaient, — Future : II siera, ils sieront. — Conditional : II sierait, ils sieraient.— Present Subjunctive : Qu'ii ji^e, qu'ils sieent so SECOND Present Infinitive. Present Participle. Past Participle. Present Indicative. Past Definite. valoir to be worth valant yaln je vaux je valua voir, to see voyant TU je vois jevia youloir, to be willing or to wish vonlant voulu je veux je voulu* boire, to drink buvant bn je bois je bua dire, to say disant dit jedia je dis faire, to make faisant fait je faia jefia prendre, to taks prenant pria jo prenda j«pria Si G R U V— Continued, DERIVATIVE TENSES. ^ Present Indicative : Je vaicx, tu vaux, il vaut ; nous valons, vous valez^ \ ils valent. — Future : Je vaudrai, tu vaudras, &c. — Conditional : Je 1 vaudraisjtu vaudrais,&c. — No Imperative.— Subjunctive: Que je yaille, V. que tu vailles, qu'il vaille: que nous valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent. Future : Je verrai, tu verras, &c., — Conditional : Je verrais, tu verrais, &c. ^Present Indicative : Je veux, tu veux, il veut : nov^ voulons, vous vouhz, I ils veulent. — Future : Je voudrai, tu voudras, &c. — Conditional : Je •< voudrais, to. — Imperative : ... ... veuillez. — Present Sub- 1 junctive : Que je veuille, qu tu veuilles, qu'il veuille ; que nous voulions, \ qv,e vous vouliez, qu'ils veuillent. r Present Indicative : Je hois, tu hois, il hoit; nous huvons, vous huvez, ils < boivent. — Present Subjunctive : Que je boive, que tu boives, qu'il (^ boive ; que nous huvions, que vous huviez, qu'ils boivent. /'Present Indicative : Je dis, tu dis, il dit : nous disons, vous dites, ils disent. — Note. Didire (to retract), mMire (to slander), predire (to pre- dict), interdire (to interdict), contredire (to contradict), are written in the 2nd person plural of the Present Indicative : vous dedisez, vous TrUdisez, vous pridisez, vous interdisez, vous contredisez. Redire, to say ^ again, is the only compound of dire, which is entirely conjugated like it. (Present Indicative : Jefais, tufais, il fait ; nous faisons, vous faites, ils font. — Future: Je ferai, tu feras, &c. — Conditional : Je ferais, tu ferais, &c. — Present Subjunctive : Que je fasse, que tu f asses, &c. {Present Indicative : Je prends, tu prends, il prend ; nous prenonft, vous prenez, ils prennent. Present Subjunctive : Que je prenne, que tu prennes, qu'il prenne, qu^ nous prenionSf que vous preniez^ qu'ils prennent. 32 Government of Verbs. List of Verbs which Govern the Preposition d«. absoudre, to absolve. s'abstenir, to abstain from accuser, to accuse of achever, to finish to affecter, to affect to s'affliger, to be grieved at ambitionner, to be ambitioics to appartenir, to belong to apprehender, to apprehend to avertir, to warn to s'aviser, to bethink one's self of avoir couturae, to be used to bl^rner, to blame for bruler, to long to cesser, to cease to se chagriner, to vex one's self charger, to charge to commander, to command conjurer, to conjure to conseiller, to advise to se contenter, to be contented with convaincre, to convince convenir, to agree to craindre, to fear to decider, to decide decourager, to discourage dedaigner, to disdain defendre, to forbid to defier, to defy to degouter, to disgust demander, to ask to se depecher, to hasten to se desaccoutumer, to disaccustom one's self desesperer, to despair of se deshabituer, to lose the habit of se desister, to desist detoumer, to deter diflferer, to defer to dire, to tell to discontinuer, to discontinue to disconvenir, to disagree to dispenser, to dispense with dissuader, to dissuade from icrire, to write *9 s'efForcer, to endeavour to s'effrayer, to frighten at empecher, to prevent to s'empresser de, to hasten to enjoindre, to enjoin to s'ennuyer, to get tired. entreprendre, to undertake to essayer, to try to s'etonner, to wonder at etre charme, to be delighted at etre surpris, to be surprised to etre tente, to be tempted to eviter, to avoid to excuser, to accuse to exempter, to exempt from feindre, to feign to feliciter, to congratulate upon finir, to finish to se flatter, to flatter one's self for fremir, to shudder se garder, to beware of gagner, to gain se glorifier, to glory in gronder, to scold for se hater, to hasten to s'imaginer, to imagine to s'impatienter, to grow impatient jurer, to swear s'indigner, to grow indignant se lasser, to grow tired manquer(*), to fail to mediter, to ineditate se meler, to meddle urith menacer, to threaten to meriter, to deserve to se moquer, to laugh at negliger, to neglect to offrir, to offer to obliger, to oblige to obtenir, to obtain s'oflFenser, to be offended a omettre, to omit to ordonner, to order to oublier, to forget to pardonner, to forgive for 38 parier, to bet parler, to talk of permettre, to allow persuader, to persuade to 86 piquer de, to pretend to plaindre, io pity for prescrire, to prescribe to presser, to urge to piier, to request to priver, to deprive professer, to profess projeter, to project promettre, to promise to proposer, to propose to recommander, to recommend to redouter, to dread refuser, to refuse to regretter, to regret to se rappeler, recollect se rejouir, to rejoice to remercier, to thank for se repentir, to repent re})rimander, to reprove reprendre, to chide reprocher, to reproach for resoudre, to resolve to lire, to laugh at risquer, to risk to rougir, to blush to sommer, to summon se soucier, to cart for souffrir, to suffer soupyonner, to suspect se souvenir, to rem,ember to suggerer, to suggest to supplier, to entreat to tacher, to endeavour to tenter, to tempt trembler, to tremble at se vanter, to boast of Verbs which Govern the Preposition d. s'abaisser, to stoop to aboutir, to lead to \self to s'accoutumer, to accustom one's admettre, to admit to s'adonner, to addict one's self to aider, to help to aimer, to like to s'amuser, to amuse one's self vrith animer, to animate to s'appliquer, to apply one's self apprendre, to learn to 8 appreter, to prepare one's self to s'arrSter, to stop at aspirer, to aspire to s'attendre, to expect to autoriser, to authorise avoir, to have to balancer, to hesitate to se borner, to limit one's self to chercher, to seek to commencer, to begin to condamner, to condemn to consentir, to consent to consister, to consist to tontinuer(*), to continue io contraindre, to compel to contribuer, to contribute to Be decider k, L Verbs ending in < addition of a t. T Avoir, to have : Etre, to be : Aller, to go : i)ir«, to say : Faire, to make : 8. Avoir : Etre : Savoir : Vouloir : Aller: 4. Avoir: Etre : U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES CDMEflETDDD uoccE 1"^ DAY USE HOSSF RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. Renewed books are subjea to immediate recall. SPJ English-Si arrange Spanish-Ei Key to ab- CONJUGATI VeRB5_ English-S GermanS__ French-S Spanish-E (New- DiTTo, by Ditto, by— hossfeli German-^ HoSSFELI Don Qui Gil Blas~" IT English- — arrai Italian — CONJUGA Vef English Mel Ditto, I Ditto, 1 Italian Gramm r Englis- 1 Enc.lis !!°!SM^ "iPM b wv 1 )mi w *i^ CK*^ * '^^N nr:rT. REC'D LU 0CU3'63 ^mt D~tn mt^-"^-^ — APRTFTW-y* Hints ^^ 2ia-50»i-8,'6i "■^^^^ {Cl795sl0)476B .General Library University of California Berkeley , HIRSCHFELD BROS., 22 AND 24, TilsnAMS BUILIUNCS, l F/l 11 K 1,A\F., I.ONDOX, E.G. HOSSFELD'S EDUCATIONAL WORKS. FI^SN^CSC. s. d. English-French Grammar, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Classes, Schools, and Private Lessons 3 o Elementary French Grammar... ... ... ... i o Advanced French Grammar 2 ^ French Composition and Idioms ... 2 6 Conjugation of French Regular and Irregular Verbs ... ... ... ... ... o 6 Polyglot Correspondent (English, French, German, Spanish) ... ... ... ... ... ... 36 English-French Commercial Correspondent ... 2 o French-English Commercial Correspondent ... 2 o English-French Dictionary i o French-English Dictionary ... ... ... ... i o The Two Dictionaries in one volume 2 o Manual OF French Conversation ... ... ... i 6 100 Passages for Translation into English and German ... ... ... ... ... ... 20 100 Passages for Translation into German and French v„ ... ... ... ... ... .... 2 o Moliere, Les Fourberies De Scapin ... ... •... i o English-German Grammar, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Classes, Schools, and Private Lessons . 3 o Mengel's German Exercises AND Idioms 2 6 Conjugation of German Regular and Irregular Verbs... ... ... ... ... ... ,...,, p 6 Hossfeld's German Reader , ... ' '^« ',.% ' ~ 2 o English-German Commercial Correspondent ... 2 o French-German Commercial Correspondent " ... 20 English-German Dictionary ... ... i o German-English Dictionary . . ... ... ... 10 The Two Dictionaries in one volume 20 Select German Stories... i 6 English-Swedish and Swedish-English DiCTibMt^" .» i*\ 6 I> JS.I>T O-N^OI^inTESGi: AM^. English -Dano- Norwegian and Dano - Norwegian - English Dictionary 4 6 HIRSCHFELD BROS. 22 and 24, BREAMS BUILDINGS, FETTEll LANE, LONDON. E.C* t^,^!is^:rp ai^T ^/ ^y'^y\\'^ ^ ^ VriJvS '^^'^y^'i^r-^^K-'^^K^^^^^